Yamaha YDP-V240 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Sintetizador
Tipo
El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual.
IMPORTANT — Check your power supply —
Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage
selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for
the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.
To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the
panel.
Weitere Informationen über die Montage des Keyboard-Ständers erhalten Sie in den Anweisungen am Ende dieses Handbuchs.
WICHTIG — Überprüfen Sie Ihren Netzanschluss —
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Spannung in Ihrem örtlichen Stromnetz mit der Spannung übereinstimmt, die auf dem Typenschild auf der
Unterseite des Instruments angegeben ist. In bestimmten Regionen ist auf der Unterseite des Keyboards in der Nähe des Netzkabels ein
Spannungswähler angebracht. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Spannungswähler auf die Spannung Ihres lokalen Stromnetzes eingestellt
ist. Dieser Spannungswähler ist bei Auslieferung auf 240 V eingestellt. Sie können die Einstellung mit einem Schlitzschraubenzieher ändern.
Drehen Sie dazu den Wählschalter, bis der Pfeil auf dem Instrument auf die richtige Spannung zeigt.
Pour obtenir des informations sur l'assemblage du support du clavier, reportez-vous aux instructions à la fin de ce manuel.
IMPORTANT — Contrôler la source d'alimentation —
Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur le panneau inférieur correspond à la tension du secteur. Dans certaines régions, l'instrument peut être
équipé d'un sélecteur de tension situé sur le panneau inférieur du clavier à proximité du cordon d'alimentation. Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est
bien réglé en fonction de la tension secteur de votre région. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d'usine. Pour modifier ce
réglage, utilisez un tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre l'indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis
à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau.
Para información sobre el montaje del soporte del teclado, consulte las instrucciones al final de este manual.
IMPORTANTE — Verifique la alimentación de corriente —
Asegúrese de que tensión de alimentación de CA de su area corresponde con la tension especificada en la placa de características del
panel inferior. En algunas zonas puede haberse incorporado un selector de tensión en el panel inferior de la unidad del teclado principal,
cerca del cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de que el selector de tensión esté ajustado a la tensión de su área. El selector de tension se
ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para cambiar el ajuste, emplee un destornillador de cabeza ”recta” para girar el selector de
modo que aparezca la tensión correcta al lado del indicador del panel.
Owner’s Manual
Bedienungsanleitung
Mode d’emploi
Manual de instrucciones
ES
FR
DE
EN
2 Owner’s Manual
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Ya maha electronic
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graph-
ics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics
appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated
on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction sec-
tion.
See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.
The exclamation point within the equi-
lateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important operat-
ing and maintenance (servicing) instruc-
tions in the literature accompanying the
product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead sym-
bol, within the equilateral triangle, is
intended to alert the user to the presence
of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”
within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a
risk of electrical shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products
are tested and approved by an independent safety testing
laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is prop-
erly installed and used in its normal and customary manner,
all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify
this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically
authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety
standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the
expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been
modified. Implied warranties may also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be cor-
rect at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the
right to change or modify any of the specifications without
notice or obligation to update existing units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Ya maha strives to produce
products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the pro-
duction methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In
keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we
want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is approx-
imately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,
contact a qualified service representative to perform the
replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incin-
erate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from chil-
dren. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by
applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required
by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have
the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for
you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-
ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and fed-
eral regulations that relate to the disposal of products that
contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-
edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manu-
facturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsi-
bility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your
dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates
the location of the name plate. The model number, serial
number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.
You should record the model number, serial number, and the
date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this
manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
92-469-
Introduction
Owner’s Manual 3
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-
tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by
the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/
or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s
supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-
able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-
tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies
and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in
the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation
of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does
not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be
determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-
nate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact
Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(class B)
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.
90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : Digital Piano
Model Name : YDP-V240
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is
suspected.
(FCC DoC)
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-
dance with the following code:
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals
in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the termi-
nal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the ter-
minal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of
the three pin plug.
• This applies only to products distributed by
Ya maha Music U.K. Ltd.
(2 wires)
Die Seriennummer dieses Produkts befindet sich an der
Unterseite des Geräts. Sie sollten die Nummer des Modells, die
Seriennummer und das Kaufdatum an den unten vorgesehenen
Stellen eintragen und diese Anleitung als Dokument Ihres Kaufs
aufbewahren.
Modellnr.
Seriennr.
(bottom)
Vous pouvez trouver le numéro de série de ce produit sur le bas de
l'unité. Notez ce numéro de série dans l'espace fourni ci-dessous et
conservez ce manuel en tant que preuve permanente de votre achat
afin de faciliter l'identification du produit en cas de vol.
N˚ de modèle
N˚ de série
El número de serie de este producto se encuentra en la parte
inferior de la unidad. Debe tomar nota del número de serie en el
espacio proporcionado a continuación y conservar este manual
como registro permanente de su adquisición; todo ello facilitará
la identificación en caso de robo.
Modelo nº
Serie nº
4 Owner’s Manual
(1)B-13 1/2
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage
is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
Use only the supplied power cord/plug.
Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and
do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on
it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything
over it.
Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the
instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden
loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke
should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,
disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used
for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.
Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in
damage to the instrument or even injury.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or
heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile
phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may
generate noise.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily
accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the
power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power
switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum
level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug
the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Power supply/Power cord
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/Power cord
Assembly
Location
Owner’s Manual 5
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,
set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all
components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls
while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use
paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping
cloths.
During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur
and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the
wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any
water off immediately with a soft cloth.
•Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a
finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key
cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and
unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall
over.
Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-
ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the
possibility of accident or injury.
If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them
periodically using the included tool.
Saving and backing up your data
The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory
when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the
Registration Memory (page 90.)
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save
important data to a USB storage device/or other external device such as a
computer (pages 98, 99, 109).
Backing up the USB storage device/external media
•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you
save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Trademarks
• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft
®
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Connections
Maintenance
Handling caution
Using the bench (If included)
Saving data
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your
instrument.
(1)B-13 2/2
6 Owner’s Manual
The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for three (3) of the songs pre-installed in this
electronic keyboard:
Mona Lisa
from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A.
Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans
Copyright © 1949 (Renewed 1976) by Famous Music Corporation
International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved
Composition Title : Against All Odds
Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403
Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD
AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD
All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public perfor-
mance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited.
Can’t Help Falling In Love
from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII
Words and Music by George David Weiss,
Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore
Copyright © 1961 ; Renewed 1989 Gladys Music (ASCAP)
Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane
Music Publishing Company, Inc.
International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music
data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM
mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.
XGlite
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format.
Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that
some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control
parameters and effects.
XF
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and
open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file con-
taining lyric data is played.
STYLE FILE
The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-
vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with
peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the com-
puter is on).
Copyright Notice
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it
has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI
files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use
is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE
ILLEGAL COPIES.
Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited
except for your personal use.
Logos
Owner’s Manual 7
Congratulations and thank you for purchasing
the Yamaha Digital Piano!
Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument
in order to take full advantage of its various features.
Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading,
and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.
The documentation and reference materials for this instrument consist of the following: Owner’s Manual
(this book)
Introduction (page 2):
Please read this section first.
Reference (page 70):
This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instrument’s various functions.
Appendix (page 110):
This section introduces reference material.
Data List
You can download various MIDI-related reference materials, such as the MIDI Data Format and MIDI
Implementation Chart, from the Yamaha Manual Library.
Connect to the Internet, visit the following website, type the model name of your instrument (such as
“YDP-V240”) in the Model Name text box, then click the Search button.
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
The package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.
•Accessory CD-ROM
•Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide
Owner’s manual (this book)
•Bench
*A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale.
•My Yamaha Product User Registration
* The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List
Accessories
8 Owner’s Manual
Special Features
GHS (Graded Hammer Standard) keyboard
with matte black keytops
Graded Hammer Standard keyboard with matte black keytops on the instrument, feature graded key
weight and response throughout the keyboard range. They respond to a heavier touch in the low range
of the keyboard and a lighter touch in the higher range of the keyboard, thus providing natural grand-
piano type playability. The matte finish of the black keys enhances keyboard’s luxurious appearance.
The Graded Hammer keyboard also offers superb playability for tremolo and other repetitive-striking
techniques.
Performance assistant technology Page 39
Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect
performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do
is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the
keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in
time with the music.
And if you can’t play with both hands, you can still play the melody simply
by tapping one key.
All you need is
one finger!
Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 17
The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be
changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can
change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to
play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety.
Play Along with Styles Page 27
Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.
The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cov-
ering wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance … and
much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or exper-
iment with new styles to expand your musical horizons.
Easy Performance with Music Notation Display Page 37
When you play back a song, the corresponding score will be shown on the
display as the song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If
the song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear
on the score display.
* No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the song you are using with the score display func-
tion does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data.
Owner’s Manual 9
Introduction
Copyright Notice....................................................................... 6
Logos........................................................................................ 6
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List ................................ 7
Accessories .............................................................................. 7
Special Features ...................................................................... 8
Setting Up 10
Key Cover............................................................................... 10
Music Rest.............................................................................. 10
Connecting to a Computer (USB TO HOST terminal)............ 11
Turning the Power On ............................................................ 11
Using Headphones................................................................. 12
Maintenance........................................................................... 13
Panel Controls and Terminals 14
Front Panel............................................................................. 15
Pedals, Jacks and Terminals ................................................. 15
Quick Guide
Changing the Display Language 16
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 17
Select and Play a Voice—MAIN............................................. 17
Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL .............................. 18
Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT 19
Play the Grand Piano Voice ................................................... 20
Using the Pedals .................................................................... 21
Fun Sounds 22
Drum Kits................................................................................ 22
Sound Effects ......................................................................... 22
The Metronome 23
Start the Metronome............................................................... 23
Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ........................................... 23
Setting the Number of Beats per Measure,
and the Length of Each Beat............................................. 24
Setting the Click bell sound .................................................... 25
Adjusting the Metronome Volume .......................................... 25
Playing Styles 26
Select a Style Rhythm ............................................................ 26
Play Along with a Style........................................................... 27
Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords .................................... 31
Using Songs 32
Play the Demo song ............................................................... 32
Select and Listen to a Song ................................................... 33
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ...................... 34
Change the Song Tempo ....................................................... 34
Song List ................................................................................ 35
Types of Songs ...................................................................... 36
Displaying the Song Score ..................................................... 37
Display the Lyrics ................................................................... 38
The Easy Way to Play Piano 39
CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands.................................... 40
CHORD/FREE Type—
Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only................ 42
MELODY Type—Play with One Finger .................................. 44
CHORD/MELODY—
Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right ..... 46
Select a Song For a Lesson 50
Lesson 1—Waiting ................................................................. 51
Lesson 2—Your Tempo ......................................................... 54
Lesson 3—Minus One............................................................ 55
Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn .......................... 56
Play Using the Music Database 57
Change a Song’s Style 58
Try Out the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 58
Using the Easy Song Arranger............................................... 58
Record Your Own Performance 60
Recording Procedure ............................................................. 61
Song Clear—Deleting User Songs......................................... 63
Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song .. 64
Backup and Initialization 65
Backup....................................................................................65
Initialization.............................................................................65
Basic Operation 66
Basic Operation ......................................................................66
The Displays...........................................................................68
MAIN Display Items ................................................................69
Reference
Play with a Variety of Effects 70
Adding Harmony.....................................................................70
Adding Reverb........................................................................71
Adding Chorus........................................................................72
Adding DSP ............................................................................73
Adding Sustain .......................................................................74
Handy Performance Features 75
Tap Start.................................................................................75
Touch Response Sensitivity ...................................................75
One Touch Setting..................................................................76
Select a Sound Type ..............................................................77
Pitch Controls .........................................................................78
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 79
Pattern Variation (Sections)....................................................79
Setting the Split Point .............................................................82
Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm
(Stop Accompaniment)......................................................83
Adjusting the Style Volume.....................................................83
Chord Basics ..........................................................................84
Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard ..............................86
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary.....................87
Song Settings 88
Song Volume ..........................................................................88
A-B Repeat .............................................................................88
Muting Independent Song Parts .............................................89
Change the Melody Voice ......................................................89
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 90
Saving to the Registration Memory ........................................90
Recalling a Registration Memory............................................91
The Functions 92
Selecting and Setting Functions .............................................92
Saving and Loading Data 95
Connecting a USB Flash Memory ..........................................95
Formatting USB Flash Memory ..............................................97
Saving Registration Memory data to USB Flash Memory ......98
Save a User Song to USB Flash Memory ..............................99
Loading Files from a USB Flash Memory.............................100
Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory ............................101
Delete User Data from the Instrument..................................102
Playing Files Located on a USB Flash Memory ...................102
Connections 103
Connectors ...........................................................................103
Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................104
Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer .....105
Remote Control of MIDI Devices ..........................................106
Initial Send............................................................................107
Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument...107
Appendix
Troubleshooting....................................................................110
Messages .............................................................................112
Keyboard Stand Assembly............................... 114
Index.....................................................................................118
Scores ..................................................................................120
Voice List ..............................................................................126
Drum Kit List .........................................................................132
Style List ...............................................................................134
Music Database List .............................................................135
Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM..........................136
Harmony Type List ...............................................................137
Effect Type List.....................................................................138
Specifications .......................................................................144
Contents
10 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
To open the key cover:
Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.
To close the key cover:
Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover
over the keys.
To raise the music rest:
1
Pull the music rest up and toward yourself
as far as it will go.
2
Flip down the two metal supports at the left
and right on the rear of the music rest.
3
Lower the music rest so that it rests on the
metal supports.
To lower the music rest:
1
Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as
it will go.
2
Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of
the music rest).
3
Gently lower the music rest backward until
it is all the way down.
Key Cover
Be careful to avoid catching your
fingers when opening or closing
the cover.
CAUTION
Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not
release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid
catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s) between
the cover and main unit.
CAUTION
Do not place objects, such as a piece of metal or paper, on top of
the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall
inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly
impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short cir-
cuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument.
CAUTION
Music Rest
Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When
lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music
rest until it is all the way down.
CAUTION
Owner’s Manual 11
Setting Up
Connect the instrument’s USB TO HOST terminal to
the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer
performance data and song files between the two (page
104). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need
to do the following:
• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instru-
ment is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable
to connect the instrument to the computer. After
making the connections, turn the instrument’s
power on.
• Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer.
Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on the
Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”.
1
Turn down the volume by turning the [MAS-
TER VOLUME] control to the left.
2
Check the power cord to make sure it is
connected properly. (See page 116.)
3
Press the power switch to turn on the
power.
Press the power switch again to turn the power OFF.
Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instru-
ment when the power is turned on. If no backup data
exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are
restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is
turned on.
Connecting to a Computer (USB TO HOST terminal)
USB
TO HOST
USB cable
Computer
USB TO HOST
terminal
Turning the Power On
Power indicator
Power switch
Power indicator
If you forget to turn off the power to the instrument and close the key
cover, the power indicator will remain lit, indicating that the power is still
on.
NOTE
Even when the switch is in the “off position, electricity is still
flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not
using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC
power cord from the wall AC outlet.
CAUTION
•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message
is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory
and result in a loss of data.
CAUTION
12 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES]
jacks.
Two [PHONES] jacks are provided.
You can connect two sets of standard stereo head-
phones. (If you are using only one pair of headphones,
you can plug them into either jack.)
Using Headphones
PHONES
Standard stereo phone plug
Bottom surface
Using the Headphone Hanger
A headphone hanger is included in the package so
that you can hang the headphoneson this instrument.
Install the headphone hanger using the included two
screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure.
Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the
hanger. Otherwise, this instrument or the hanger may be dam-
aged.
CAUTION
Owner’s Manual 13
Setting Up
To keep your instrument in optimum condition, we recommend that you periodically follow the maintenance points
below.
Instrument and Bench Maintenance
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly
damp cloth.
Tighten the screws of the instrument and bench periodi-
cally.
Pedal Cleaning
As with an acoustic piano, pedals may become tar-
nished across the ages. When this occurs, polish the
pedal with a compound designed for piano pedals.
Before using the compound, make sure to read the
instructions for proper usage.
Tuning
Unlike an acoustic piano, the instrument does not need
to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.
Transporting
If you move to another location, you can transport the
instrument along with other belongings. You can move
the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the
unit down to the condition it was in when you first took
it out of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally.
Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side.
Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or
shock.
When transporting the assembled instrument, make sure
all screws are properly tightened and have not been
loosened by moving the instrument.
Maintenance
Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-
impregnated wiping cloths.
CAUTION
Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-
impregnated wiping cloths. Otherwise, the pedal may become dis-
colored or degraded.
CAUTION
14 Owner’s Manual
Panel Controls and Terminals
Front Panel
PHONES
#9
#8
#7
$0
#6
q
q
USB
TO HOST
PEDAL
Voice Category List (page 126)
Style Category List (page 134)
Song Category List (page 35)
Music Database List (page 135)
we
r
tyu
!0
i
o
!4 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9
!1
!3
!2
Owner’s Manual 15
Panel Controls and Terminals
¸
q Power switch ( ) ...................................page 11
w [MASTER VOLUME] control ...........pages 11, 66
e [DEMO] button.........................................page 32
r FILE CONTROL [MENU],
[EXECUTE] buttons.......................pages 95–101
t [LYRICS] button.......................................page 38
y [SCORE] button.......................................page 37
u [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button............................page 40
i [FUNCTION] button.........................pages 68, 92
o [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .............page 23
!0 [TEMPO/TAP] button.......................pages 34, 75
!1 LESSON [L], [R], [START] buttons.........page 51
!2 SONG MEMORY
[REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons ......................page 61
!3 [REPEAT & LEARN]/
[ACMP ON/OFF] button ..................pages 56, 27
!4 [A-B REPEAT]/
[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button............pages 88, 79
!5 [REW]/[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ...pages 34, 79
!6 [FF]/[SYNC STOP] button ...............pages 34, 81
!7 [PAUSE]/[SYNC START] button......pages 34, 80
!8 [START/STOP] button ...............pages 26, 33, 67
!9 [MUSIC DATABASE] button....................page 57
@0 [CONTRAST] knob ................................. page 69
@1 [EXIT] button........................................... page 68
@2 [SONG] button ........................................ page 33
@3 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button ....... page 58
@4 [STYLE] button ....................................... page 26
@5 [VOICE] button........................................ page 17
@6 Dial....................................................pages 67, 92
@7 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]
buttons .............................................pages 67, 92
@8 Number buttons [0]–[9],
[+] and [-] buttons............................pages 67, 92
@9 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.......................... page 19
#0 [DUAL ON/OFF] button .......................... page 18
#1 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ................. page 70
#2 [DSP ON/OFF] button............................. page 73
#3 [PIANO RESET] button .......................... page 20
#4 REGIST MEMORY
[MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons......... page 90
#5 Drum Kit .................................................. page 22
The illustrations above each key indicate the drum and
percussion instruments assigned to the keys when
“Standard Kit 1” is selected.
#6 Pedals.......................................................page 21
#7 [PEDAL] jack..........................................page 116
#8 [PHONES] jacks.......................................page 12
#9 USB TO DEVICE terminal....................... page 96
$0 USB TO HOST terminal ........................ page 104
Front Panel
@0
@1
@2
@3
@6
@9
@5
#0 #1
#2
#3
@4
@8
@7
#4
#5
Display (pages 68, 69)
f
r
Pedals, Jacks and Terminals
16 Owner’s Manual
Changing the Display Language
This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display
language. The default display language is English, but if you switch to
Japanese the lyrics, file names, demo display, and some messages will be
displayed in Japanese where appropriate.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons a number of
times until the “Language” item appears.
The currently selected display language will appear below the “Lan-
guage” item.
When highlighted you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the lan-
guage as required.
3
Select a display language.
The [+] button selects English and the [-] button selects Japanese.
The language selection will be stored in the internal flash memory so
that it is retained even when the power is turned off.
4
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
f
r
Language item
The currently selected
language
Quick Guide
Owner’s Manual 17
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,
this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass,
strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide vari-
ety of musical sounds.
This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
The main voice selection display will appear.
The currently selected voice number and name will be highlighted.
2
Select the voice you want to play.
While watching the highlighted voice name rotate the dial. The avail-
able voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice
selected here becomes the main voice.
For this example select the “106 Flute” voice.
3
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Select and Play a Voice—MAIN
The currently
selected voice num-
ber and name
Select 106 Flute
Adjusts volume.
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
18 Owner’s Manual
You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard.
The second voice is known as the “dual” voice.
1
Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button.
The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off.
When turned on the dual voice “DUAL” will appear in the MAIN dis-
play. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the
main voice when you play the keyboard.
2
Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than
a second.
The dual voice selection display will appear.
3
Select the desired dual voice.
Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you
want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice.
For this example try selecting the “124 Vibraphone” voice.
Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL
Voice Number
The currently selected dual voice
Dual voice selection display
Hold for longer
than a second
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
Owner’s Manual 19
4
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main
and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split
point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 82).
1
Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.
The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When
turned on the split voice “SPLIT” will appear in the MAIN display. The
currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split
point.
2
Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than
a second.
The split voice selection display will appear.
Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT
Two voices will sound at the same time.
021
(A-1)
024
(C0)
036
(C1)
048
(C2)
060
(C3)
072
(C4)
084
(C5)
096
(C6)
108
(C7)
Main voice and dual voice
Split voice
Split point (default value is 054)
Voice Number
The currently selected split
voice
Split voice selection display
Hold for longer
than a second
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
20 Owner’s Manual
3
Select the desired split voice.
Watch the highlighted split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you
want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice
which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example
try selecting the “042 Folk Guitar” voice.
4
Play the keyboard.
Try selecting and playing a range of split voices.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.
Press the [PIANO RESET] button.
The “001 Natural! Grand Piano” voice will be selected.
Play the Grand Piano Voice
When you press the [PIANO
RESET] button all settings other
than touch sensitivity are turned
off. The dual and split voices will
also be turned off, so only the
Grand Piano voice will play over
the entire keyboard.
NOTE
Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
Owner’s Manual 21
The instrument has three foot pedals that produce a
range of expressive effects similar to those produced
by the pedals on an acoustic piano.
Damper (Right) Pedal
The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an
acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer.
Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes.
The damper pedal also features a naturally expressive half-pedal function.
Sostenuto (Center) Pedal
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal
while the note(s) are held, those notes will sustain as long as you hold the
pedal (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played
notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for
example, while other notes are played “staccato.
Soft (Left) Pedal
The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes
played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that
are already playing when it is pressed.
Using the Pedals
If the damper pedal doesn’t
work, make sure that the pedal
cord is properly plugged into the
jack (page 116).
NOTE
Half-pedal:
While playing the piano with
Sustain and you want to slightly
mute the sustained sound,
release the damper pedal from
maximum position to half posi-
tion.
NOTE
The pedal functions do not
affect Split voice.
NOTE
When you press the damper
pedal here, the notes you play
before you release the pedal
have a longer sustain.
Organ, string and choir voices
will continue to sound for as
long as the sostenuto pedal is
depressed.
NOTE
When you press the sostenuto
pedal here while holding the
note, the note will sustain as
long as you hold the pedal.
22 Owner’s Manual
Fun Sounds
This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can
use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and
much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties.
Drum Kit Selection Procedure (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17)
1 Press the [VOICE] button.
2 Use the dial to select “132 Standard Kit 1”.
3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds!
Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percus-
sion sounds! Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll
hear a triangle, maracas, bongos, drums ... a
comprehensive variety of drum and percussion
sounds. For details on the instruments included
in the drum kit voices (voice numbers 132 to
143), see the “Drum Kit List” on page 132.
Sound Effect Selection Procedure (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17)
1 Press the [VOICE] button.
2 Use the dial to select “143 SFX Kit 2”.
3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects!
As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a
submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door, and many
other useful effects. “142 SFX Kit 1” includes lightning,
running water, dogs barking, and others. Some keys do
not have assigned sound effects, and will therefore pro-
duce no sound.
For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit
voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the “Drum
Kit List” on page 133.
Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other
normal instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at
different pitches. If you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound
of a different drum or percussion instrument.
The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 142 and 143). When
either of these voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard.
Drum Kits
Sound Effects
Owner’s Manual 23
The Metronome
The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and
time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most comfortable
for you.
Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [MET-
RONOME ON/OFF] button.
To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button
again.
1
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo set-
ting.
2
Use the dial to select a tempo from 5 to 280.
Start the Metronome
Adjusting the Metronome Tempo
4/4
Current setting
Tempo
The Metronome
24 Owner’s Manual
In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.
1
Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for
longer than a second to select the function “Time Signa-
ture–Numerator”.
2
Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure.
The available range is from 1 through 60. Select 5 for this example.
A bell accent will be sounded at the first beat of each measure.
3
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times
as necessary to select the beat length function “Time Sig-
nature–Denominator”.
4
Use the dial to select the beat length.
Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter
note, eighth note, or 16
th
note). Select 8 for this example.
Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat
Hold for longer
than a second
Denominator
(The length of
one beat.)
Numerator
(Number of
beats per
measure.)
The metronome time signature
will synchronize to a style or
song that is playing, so these
parameters cannot be changed
while a style or song is playing.
NOTE
f
r
The Metronome
Owner’s Manual 25
This allows you to select whether the click sound has a bell accent, or plays only a click sound.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Bell
item.
3
You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons to turn the bell
sound on or off.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Met-
ronome Volume item.
3
Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required.
Setting the Click bell sound
Adjusting the Metronome Volume
f
r
f
r
Metronome volume
26 Owner’s Manual
Playing Styles
This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces
accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to
match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 160 dif-
ferent styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures
(see page 134 for a complete list of the available styles).
In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features.
Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro
trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played
using percussion instruments only.
1
Press the [STYLE] button.
The style select display will appear. The currently selected style number
and name will be highlighted.
2
Select a style.
Use the dial to select the style you want to use.
A list of all the available styles is provided on page 134.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button.
The style rhythm will start playing.
Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop
playback.
Select a Style Rhythm
When you play the style, set the
Sound Type to “Style.” Doing
this a more natural, enhanced
sound over the internal speak-
ers (see page 77). However,
when using the headphones,
normal sound is applied.
NOTE
The currently selected style
Style files transferred from a
computer or stored on a USB
flash memory device connected
to the instrument can be
selected and used in the same
way as the internal Styles (Style
numbers 161–). File transfer
instructions are provided on
page 107.
NOTE
Style numbers 131, 143–160
have no rhythm part and there-
fore no rhythm will play if you
use them for the above exam-
ple. For these styles first turn
auto accompaniment on as
described on page 27, press the
[START/STOP] button, and the
accompaniment bass and chord
parts will begin playing when
you play a key to the left of the
keyboard split point.
NOTE
Playing Styles
Owner’s Manual 27
You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page.
Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accom-
paniment that you can play along with.
1
Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style.
2
Turn automatic accompaniment on.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.
Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment
off.
3
Turn sync start on.
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.
Play Along with a Style
When automatic accompaniment is on ...
The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (054: F#2) becomes
the “auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the
accompaniment chords.
This icon appears when
automatic accompani-
ment is on.
The keyboard split point can be
changed as required: refer to
page 82.
NOTE
Split point (054: F#2)
Auto accompaniment region
Flashes when sync start
is on.
Playing Styles
28 Owner’s Manual
When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a
style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard
split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function
off.
4
Play a left-hand chord to start the style.
You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords.
This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try play-
ing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point.
The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you
play.
5
Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody
with your right hand.
6
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback
when you’re done.
You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.
Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 79.
Try this!
Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 29. These
examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progres-
sions sound good with the styles.
Split point
Auto accompaniment region
Split point
Auto accompaniment region
Playing Styles
Owner’s Manual 29
Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords
Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment.
In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord
sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same
chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall
feel of the music you play.
On page 27 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital
to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take
your accompaniments to a new level.
On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the
instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively
creating a complete song.
Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Play the scores with the left hand.
Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 27.
* The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to
produce the chord progressions.
—Dance music with simple chords—
This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start
again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button
and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending.
Recommended Style
041 Euro Trance
Play to the left of the split point.
Split point
F
C G Am
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Playing Styles
30 Owner’s Manual
—3-chord boogie-woogie—
This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the
progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords!
—Bossa nova with jazz-style chords—
This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When
you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Recommended Style
148 Piano Boogie
Recommended Style
096 Bossa Nova
F
G
F
C C
C
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
G7
E7
Dm CM7
Am A7
FM7
Bm7
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Playing Styles
Owner’s Manual 31
There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords:
Easy Chords
Standard Chords
The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. The function is called Multi Fingering.
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 27). The keyboard to the left of the
split point (default: 054/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this
area of the keyboard.
Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This method lets you easily play chords in the
accompaniment range of the keyboard using only
one, two, or three fingers.
Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
This method lets you produce accompaniment by
playing chords using normal fingerings in the
accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords
C
D
b
E
b
F
#
G
#
B
b
D
b
E
b
F
#
DEFGABCDEF
Split point (default: 054/F#2)
Root notes and the corresponding keys
Accompaniment
range
•To play a major chord
Press the root note of the chord.
C
Cm
C7
Cm7
•To play a minor chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest black key to the left of it.
•To play a seventh chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest white key to the left of it.
•To play a minor seventh chord
Press the root note together with the
nearest white and black keys to the left
of it (three keys altogether).
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
CmM7
CM7
C6
Csus4
Caug
CM7aug
C7aug
C7sus4
Csus2
C7
Cm
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
CmM7
(
9
)
CM7
(
9
)
Cm7
(
9
)
C7
(
b9
)
C7
(
b13
)
Cm7
(
11
)
CM7
(
#11
)
C
(
b5
)
C
(
9
)
(
9
)
C6
(
9
)
Cm
(
9
)
C7
(
#11
)
C7
(
#9
)
C7
(
13
)
C7
Cm6
Cm7
C
(
b5
)
CM7
(
b5
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
CmM7
(
b5
)
How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords]
* Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords
will be recognized without them.
32 Owner’s Manual
Using Songs
With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a
piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to a demo song and 29
internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions
provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and
more. The songs are organized by category.
In this section we’ll learn how to play a demo song and select other
songs, and briefly describe the demo song and 29 songs provided.
1
Press the [DEMO] button
The demo song will start playing.
To stop demo play back at any time, press the [DEMO] button or
[START/STOP] button.
Play the Demo song
Listen Lesson Record
Song
or
Using Songs
Owner’s Manual 33
1
Press the [SONG] button
The song selection display will appear.
The currently selected song number and name will be highlighted.
2
Select a song.
Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 35.
Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.
3
Listen to the song.
Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song.
You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-
ton again.
Select and Listen to a Song
001–030 Built in Songs (See page 35)
031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself).
036–
Songs transferred from a computer (pages 107–109) or Songs in a
USB flash memory connected to the instrument (page 95)
The currently selected song
number and name
•You can also play songs you
have recorded yourself (User
Songs) or songs that have been
transferred to the instrument
from a computer in the same
way that you play the internal
songs.
NOTE
The song highlighted here
can be played
Song start!
Using Songs
34 Owner’s Manual
These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF],
rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song.
You can change the song tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will
appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to
anywhere from 5 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.
You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause
Change the Song Tempo
PAUSE
Press the pause
button to pause
playback.
REW
Press the fast
reverse button to
rapidly return to an
earlier point in the
song.
FF
Press the fast for-
ward button to rap-
idly skip ahead to
a later point in the
song.
Using Songs
Owner’s Manual 35
These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s Easy Song Arranger feature,
songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Sug-
gested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used.
: Includes chord data.
The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 16, 20 and 30 which is copyrighted, are provided in the Song
Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual.
Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same
as the original.
Song List
Category No. Name Suggested Uses
Main Demo
1 Mozart Piano Sonata No.13, K333 This song showcases the beautiful piano sound.
2 Winter Serenade
The songs in this category have been created to give
you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this
instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with
the various features.
3Take off
Voice Demo
4 Live! Grand Demo
These songs features some of the instrument’s many
useful voices. They make maximum use of the
characteristics of each voice, and might serve as
inspiration for your own compositions.
5 Live! Orchestra Demo
6 Cool! RotorOrgan Demo
7 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo
8 ModernHarp & Sweet Soprano Demo
Function Demo
9 Hallelujah Chorus
Use these songs to experience some of the
instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for
the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the
performance assistant technology feature.
The lesson function cannot be used with songs 10
and 11.
10 Ave Maria
11 Nocturne op.9-2
Piano Solo
12 For Elise
These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as
lesson songs.
13 Maple Leaf Rag
14 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair
Piano Ensemble
15 Amazing Grace
A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also
well suited for use as lesson songs.
16 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans)
17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.
18 Scarborough Fair
19 Old Folks at Home
Piano
Accompaniment
20 Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403)
When you need to practice backing (accompaniment)
patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is
ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band.
These songs allow you to practice backing parts one
hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to
master this important skill.
21 Ep Ballad
22 Boogie Woogie
23 Rock Piano
24 Salsa
25 Country Piano
26 Gospel R&B
27 Medium Swing
28 Jazz Waltz
29 Medium Bossa
30
SlowRock (Can’t Help Falling In Love: George
David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore)
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
CHORD
Using Songs
36 Owner’s Manual
The following three types of songs can be used by this instrument.
Demo Song and Preset songs
(the 30 songs built into the instrument)........................................Song numbers 001–030.
User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035.
External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–.
* The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 108 for instructions on how
to transfer the songs to the instrument.
The chart below shows the basic processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song
files from storage to playback.
Types of Songs
Record
(page 60)
Connect
(page 103)
Transfer
(page 107)
Your own
performance
Song Song
Computer USB flash memory
Song Song Song
Save
Play
Song Storage locations
External Songs (loaded Song)
(036–)
USB
(036–)
User Songs
(031–035)
Preset Songs
(001–030)
The 30 songs built
into the instrument.
Load
User songs cannot produce score display as they are. If you convert a user song file
to SMF and save it to USB flash memory, however, it becomes capable of producing
score display and can be used with the lesson features.
NOTE
Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files
transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the flash
memory area for the external song, and vice versa.
NOTE
Using Songs
Owner’s Manual 37
This instrument is capable of display the scores of songs.
Scores are displayed for the 30 internal preset songs as well as songs in SMF format stored in a USB flash
memory or the instrument’s internal flash memory.
1
Select a song.
Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 33.
2
Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will
appear.
There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff.
These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button.
The song will begin playing. The triangular will move across the top of
the score to indicate the current location.
4
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Displaying the Song Score
The score is created from the
recorded song data, and it may
not be exactly the same as orig-
inal score.
Both chords and lyrics will be
shown in single-staff score dis-
play of a song that includes
chord and lyric data.
When there are many lyrics they
may be displayed in two rows a
measure.
Some lyrics or chords may be
abbreviated if the selected song
has a lot of lyrics.
Small notes that are hard to
read may be easier to read after
you use the quantize function
(page 94).
NOTE
Single-staff
Double-staff
Melody score
Marker
Chord
Lyrics
No chords or lyrics are shown
on the double-staff.
NOTE
Using Songs
38 Owner’s Manual
If a song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display.
No lyrics will be displayed for a song that contains no lyric data even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed.
1
Select a song.
Select a song between 16, 20, and 30 by performing steps 1 and 2
described on page 33.
2
Press the [LYRICS] button.
The title, lyricist, and composer of the song will appear on the display.
3
Press the [START/STOP] button.
The song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the
display.
The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the song.
Preset Songs That Can be Used For Lyrics Display
Display the Lyrics
Number Name
016 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans)
020 Against All Odds (Collins 0007403)
030 Can’t Help Falling In Love (George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore)
If the lyrics display shows gar-
bled characters, try changing
the display language (page 16).
NOTE
Songs downloaded from the
Internet or commercially avail-
able song files, including XF for-
mat files (page 6), are
compatible with the lyrics dis-
play features as long as they are
standard MIDI file format files
containing lyric data. Lyrics dis-
play may not be possible with
some files.
NOTE
Song title, lyricist,
and composer.
Lyrics and chord
display
Owner’s Manual 39
The Easy Way to Play Piano
This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature
that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even
though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any
notes and still sound good! You could even just tap one key and the
results would be a beautiful melody. So even if you can’t play piano and
can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun.
Performance assistant technology offers four selectable types. Select the type that produces the best results
for you.
Chord...................... No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-bal-
anced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play
anything with both your left and right hands.
Chord/Free........... If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with left-
hand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the
left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to
support the melody you are playing with your right hand.
Melody ................... This type lets you play the melody of the selected song by playing any
keys with just one finger. Start playing melodies right away, even if you’ve
never played a keyboard instrument before!
Chord/Melody .... Play the melody of the selected song with one finger on the right-hand
section of the keyboard, and play chords on the left-hand section of the
keyboard using the Chord type.
Refer to page 48 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play.
Split point
Play your own melody with the right hand.
Split point
The Easy Way to Play Piano
40 Owner’s Manual
1
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.
This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.
The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-
formance assistant technology feature is on.
2
Select the CHORD type.
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the
Chord type by using the dial.
3
Select a song.
Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a
song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “010 Ave
Maria”.
When the Chord type is selected, features only available for this song
can be seen in the display!
CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands
What is a Song?
You know the normal meaning of this word, but in this instrument the term
“Song” refers to the data that makes up a complete song. The performance
assistant technology features uses the chord and melody data, and should
always be used with a song (page 32).
The currently
selected type
Hold for longer than a second
Select Chord
Using Songs (page 32)
NOTE
The song displayed here will
be played.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
Owner’s Manual 41
4
Press the [START/STOP] button.
Song playback will begin.
The basic pattern will play repeatedly. Listen to the basic pattern for
four measures while getting a feel for the basic pattern, then begin play-
ing yourself from the fifth measure. The keys you should play will be
shown in the display.
5
Play on the keyboard.
Try playing the score on the left with both hands. You can even play the
same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. You’ll notice that at
measure five the notes will come out according to the score on the right.
Keep playing, and performance assistant technology Chord type will
continue to “correct” the notes that you play.
This is the performance assistant technology Chord type.
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
6
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance
assistant technology feature off.
“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-
ogy type is normally shown.
Before After
The score for Ave Maria is pro-
vided on page 122.
NOTE
The Easy Way to Play Piano
42 Owner’s Manual
1
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.
This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.
The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-
formance assistant technology feature is on.
2
Select the CHORD/FREE type.
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the
Chord/Free type by using the dial.
3
Select a song.
Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a
song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “011 Noc-
turne”.
CHORD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only
The currently
selected type
Hold for longer
than a second
Select
Chord/Free
Using Songs (page 32)
NOTE
The song displayed here will
be played.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
Owner’s Manual 43
4
Press the [START/STOP] button.
Song playback will begin.
The left-hand keys you should play will be shown on the display.
5
Play on the keyboard.
Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of
the split point with your left hand.
Play the Nocturne melody with your right hand. Continually play an F-
A-C arpeggio with your left hand as indicated by the score shown in the
display. Although you’re repeatedly playing the same notes with your
left hand, the actual notes produced will change to match the music.
This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Free type.
Press the [SCORE] button if you want to see the score for the right-hand
part in the display.
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
6
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance
assistant technology feature off.
“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-
ogy type is normally shown.
Split point
With this type notes played on the
left-hand side of the split point will
actually sound an octave higher.
The score for Nocturne is pro-
vided on page 124.
NOTE
The Easy Way to Play Piano
44 Owner’s Manual
See page 48 for some hints on how to play melodies.
1
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.
This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.
The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-
formance assistant technology feature is on.
2
Select the MELODY type.
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Mel-
ody type by using the dial.
3
Select a song.
Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a
song by using the dial.
MELODY Type—Play with One Finger
The currently
selected type
Select Melody
Hold for longer than a second
Using Songs (page 32)
NOTE
The song displayed here will
be played.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
Owner’s Manual 45
4
Press the [START/STOP] button.
Song playback will begin.
Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not
sound. You can enjoy playing the melody yourself (step 5).
5
Play on the keyboard.
To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then tap a key with one fin-
ger of your right hand in time with the music. You can play any key. If
you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE]
button to call up the melody score in the display.
How does it sound? You’ve played the melody using only one finger
thanks to the performance assistant technology Melody type!
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
6
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance
assistant technology feature off.
“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-
ogy type is normally shown.
Song start!
Sounds like a
melody!
The Easy Way to Play Piano
46 Owner’s Manual
1
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.
This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.
The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-
formance assistant technology feature is on.
2
Select the CHORD/MELODY type.
Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so
that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the
Chord/Melody type by using the dial.
3
Select a song.
Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a
song by using the dial.
CHORD/MELODY—Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right
The currently
selected type
Select
Chord/Melody
Hold for longer than a second
Using Songs (page 32)
NOTE
The song displayed here will
be played.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
Owner’s Manual 47
4
Press the [START/STOP] button.
Song playback will begin.
The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to eight measures while memoriz-
ing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the ninth mea-
sure.
5
Play on the keyboard.
Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of
the split point with your left hand.
Play along with the rhythm of the song melody with your right hand.
You can play any keys as long as you’re playing to the right of the split
point. At the same time play accompaniment-like chords and phrases
with your left hand. No matter what you play, you’ll produce the song
melody with your right hand and beautiful chords and phrases with your
left hand.
This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Melody type.
If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the
[SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display.
You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
6
Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance
assistant technology feature off.
“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-
ogy type is normally shown.
Split point
With this type notes played on the
left-hand side of the split point will
actually sound an octave higher.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
48 Owner’s Manual
Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro!
Here are a few hints for using the Chord type.
If you select Chord/Free or Chord/Melody, the left-hand section of the
keyboard becomes the Chord type section, so use these hints on the left-
hand section of the keyboard.
To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands
spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately
with your left and right hands (any notes will do).
How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you
play thanks to the performance assistant technology Chord type!
Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of
playing produce different results.
Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a
melody with your right ... or any other combination.
The chord information
included in the song is
displayed in the lower
area of the MAIN display.
You will get even better
results if you match your
left-hand rhythm to rhythm
of the chord indicator in
the display.
Sounds like you’re
playing the right
notes!
Play with the left and right hands
at the same timing—type 1.
Play with the left and right hands
at the same timing—type 2.
Play alternately with the left
and right hands—type 3.
Play 3 notes at once
with your right hand.
Play 1 note at a time with your right
hand (for example: index finger
middle finger
ring finger).
Play 3 notes at once
with your right hand.
The Easy Way to Play Piano
Owner’s Manual 49
Make Use of the Score in the Melody Type.
If you want to play the melody with the correct rhythm, use the onscreen
score feature.
Displaying the Score.
After performing steps 1 to 4 on page 44, press the [SCORE] button.
The melody score will appear.
The marker will indicate the current position in the score during playback.
If you play a key each time the marker appears above a note in the score
you will be able to play the melody with the correct “original” rhythm.
Songs That Can Be Used With the performance assistant technology.
When the Chord type is selected the performance assistant technology can only be used with songs that
include chord data. When the Melody type is selected the performance assistant technology will only
work with songs that include melody data. In order to find out if a song includes the required data, first
select the song and then press the [SCORE] button. If chords appear on the display when you press the
[SCORE] button you can use the Chord type or any combination type that includes the Chord type. If
melody appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Melody type or any
combination type that includes the Melody type.
External Songs and the performance assistant technology.
Songs downloaded from the Internet can also be used with the performance assistant technology as
long as they include the required chord and/or melody data.
See page 108 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument.
Chord
Marker
Melody
Appears when the performance
assistant technology is on
Play while watching the
marker
50 Owner’s Manual
Lesson Flow:
Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category!
The practice methods:
Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes.
Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing.
Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song.
Select the
song you
want to learn.
Select the part you
want to work on
(right hand, left
hand, both hands).
Select lesson
1, 2, or 3.
Lesson
start!
Song numbers 10 and 11 are
function demos for perfor-
mance assistant. The lesson
function cannot be used with
them.
NOTE
Yamaha Education Suite
You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or
both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0/1)
transferred to the instrument from a computer. (page 107) During the
lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play
wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can han-
dle. It’s never too late to start learning!
Select a Song For a Lesson
Select a Song For a Lesson
Owner’s Manual 51
In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you
play the right note.
1
Select a song for your lesson.
Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want
to use for your lesson. As listed on page 35 there are a variety of song
types.
2
Press [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
3
Select the part you want to practice.
Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand
lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-
hands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the upper right cor-
ner of the display.
Lesson 1—Waiting
Select R for right-hand lesson.
Select L for left-hand lesson.
Select LR for bothhands lesson.
Select a Song For a Lesson
52 Owner’s Manual
4
Start Lesson 1.
Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the
LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in
sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Lesson 1 ... An
explanation of the selected lesson will appear on the display for a few
seconds before the lesson begins.
Song playback will begin automatically when you select
Lesson 1.
Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The next note to be played
is indicated by a dot () on the appropriate key of the graphic on-screen
keyboard. When you play the correct note the marker will move to the
next key to be played. Playback will pause and wait for you to play the
correct note. The triangular marker () above the score indicates play-
back progress.
(Lesson 1)
(Lesson 2)
(Lesson 3)
(Song Lesson off)
In this case the “R1” indicates that right-
hand lesson 1 has been selected.
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
Marker
Marker
Select a Song For a Lesson
Owner’s Manual 53
5
Stop the Lesson mode
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2.
See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again
from the beginning.
Shifting the keyboard left or right.
The hidden ( ) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by
pressing the [+] or [-] button.
61 keys of the keyboard’s range are shown on the display. This instrument
actually have 88 keys. In some songs that include very high or low notes,
those notes may fall outside the displayed range and may not be shown on
the display. In such cases an “over” indicator appear to the left or right of
the graphic keyboard. Use the [+] or [-] button to shift the keyboard left or
right so you can see the notes (the marker will appear on the appropriate
key in the display). Notes that actually fall outside the keyboard’s range
cannot be used in the lesson.
The displayed range (61 keys)
Actual keyboard range is 88 keys
When the lesson song has played all the way
through your performance will be evaluated in 4
levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent.
“Excellent!” is the highest evaluation.
The evaluation feature can be
turned off via the FUNCTION
Grade item (page 94).
NOTE
Select a Song For a Lesson
54 Owner’s Manual
Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed
you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own
pace.
1
Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and
3 on page 51).
2
Start Lesson 2.
Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are
selected in sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Les-
son 1 ...
Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is
selected.
The triangular marker will appear in the score display, and will move to
indicate the current note in the song. Try to play the notes at the correct
timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo
will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original
tempo.
3
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3.
Lesson 2—Your Tempo
In this case the “R2” indicates
that right-hand lesson 2 has
been selected.
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
Play while following the
score marker
Select a Song For a Lesson
Owner’s Manual 55
Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you
have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song.
1
Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and
3 on page 51).
2
Start Lesson 3.
Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are
selected in sequence: Lesson 1 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 Off Les-
son 1 ...
Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is
selected.
Play along while listening to the song. The score marker and keyboard
marker in the display will indicate the notes to play.
3
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Lesson 3—Minus One
In this case the “R3” indicates
that right-hand lesson 3 has
been selected.
Left-hand part Right-hand part
(In the case of a right-hand lesson)
Marker
Marker
Select a Song For a Lesson
56 Owner’s Manual
Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to
repeatedly practice a section you find difficult.
Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during a lesson.
The song location will move back four measures from the point at
which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-mea-
sure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you
pressed the [REPEAT & LEARN] button, and then jump back four mea-
sures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all
you have to do is press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button when you
make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it
right
Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn
•You can change the number of
measures the Repeat and learn
function jumps back by pressing
a number button [1]–[9] during
repeat playback.
NOTE
Press imme-
diately
Oops!
A mistake!
e Jump back 4 measures and
repeat playback
q
w
Song playback
direction
Owner’s Manual 57
Play Using the Music Database
You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to
select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ...
simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel
settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of
sounds and style!
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
A Music Database list will appear in the display.
2
Select a Music Database.
Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 135 of
the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that
matches the image of the song you intend to play.
For this example select the “158 Patrol”.
3
Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your
right.
The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the
left of the split point (page 27). Refer to pages 29–31 for information
about playing chords.
If you press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display at this
point you can check the assigned voice and style.
4
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
Music Database (MDB) files
transferred from a computer or
stored on a USB flash memory
device connected to the instru-
ment can be selected and used
in the same way as the internal
Music Databases (MDB num-
bers 301–). File transfer instruc-
tions are provided on page 107.
NOTE
Split Point
58 Owner’s Manual
Change a Song’s Style
In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to
play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you
can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova,
as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by
changing the style with which a song is played.
You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for
a complete change of image.
You can try out the Easy Song Arranger feature using the internal Hallelujah Chorus song.
Press the [SONG] button and use the dial to select “009
Hallelujah Chorus. Press the [START/STOP] button begin
playback of the song. An explanation of the Easy Song
Arranger feature will appear on the display.
As the song progresses the styles will change, changing the overall
image of the song.
Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other
songs as well—any songs that include chord data.
1
Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.
The Song Select display will appear. The currently selected song name
and number will be highlighted.
2
Select a Song.
Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange.
Try Out the Easy Song Arranger
Using the Easy Song Arranger
The score for Hallelujah Chorus
is provided on page 120.
NOTE
The currently selected song
number and name are dis-
played here.
Change a Song’s Style
Owner’s Manual 59
3
Listen to the song.
Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move
on to the next step while the song is playing.
4
Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.
The Style Select display will appear. The currently selected style name
and number will be highlighted.
5
Select a style.
Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles.
As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only
the styles change.
6
Select a voice part.
If you press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second a
voice list will appear. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be
selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button.
7
Select a voice you want to play as a song melody.
Use the dial to change the melody voice. As you select different melody
voices the song will remain the same while only the melody voice
changes.
When playing song numbers
010, 011, and 020 to 030 while
using the Easy Song Arranger,
melody tracks will be automati-
cally muted and no melody will
sound. In order to hear the mel-
ody tracks you will need to press
the SONG MEMORY buttons [3]
to [5].
NOTE
Song start!
The currently selected style
number and name are dis-
played here.
Because the Easy Song
Arranger uses song data you
can’t specify chords by playing
in the accompaniment range of
the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/
OFF] button will not function.
If the time signature of the song
and style are different, the time
signature of the song will be
used.
NOTE
Hold for longer
than a second
The Melody R and Melody
L displays will be selected
alternately each time you
press the [VOICE] button.
The currently selected mel-
ody voice will be displayed.
If you press the [INTRO/END-
ING/rit.] button during style play-
back, the style will stop but the
song will continue playing. Use
the [START/STOP] button to
stop playback completely.
NOTE
60 Owner’s Manual
Record Your Own Performance
You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as
user songs 031 through 035. Once your performances have been saved
as user songs they can be played in the same way as the internal
songs. User songs can also be saved to a USB flash memory device, as
described on page 99.
Recordable Data
5 melody tracks and 1 Style (chord) track can be recorded. To record your own
performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to spec-
ify the track(s) you want to record on.
SONG MEMORY (Track) [1]–[5]
Record the melody parts.
SONG MEMORY (Track) [A]
Records the style pattern and chord parts.
Track Mute
This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back
while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 89).
Up to approximately 30,000
notes can be recorded for the
five user songs if you record
only to the melody tracks.
User songs are saved as SMF
(Standard MIDI File) format 0
files. Refer to page 107 for infor-
mation on SMF files.
NOTE
Melody Chords
Specify track(s)
and record
Track
1
Track
2
Track
3
Track
4
Track
5
Track
A
Record Your Own Performance
Owner’s Manual 61
1
From the MAIN display press the [SONG] button, then use
the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you
want to record to.
2
Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your
selection on the display.
Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track
Together
Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-
ing the [REC] button.
Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.
The selected tracks will be highlighted in the display.
Record a Melody track
Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-
ing the [REC] button. Select button [1]–[3] if you want to record a dual
voice. Split voices cannot be recorded.
The selected track will be highlighted in the display.
Recording Procedure
To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a sec-
ond time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while
recording is in progress.
Rotate the dial to select a
song number between 031
and 035.
If you record to track that con-
tains previously-recorded
data the previous data will be
overwritten and lost.
CAUTION
Style accompaniment is auto-
matically turned on when you
select the style track [A] for
recording.
Style accompaniment cannot
turned on or off while recording
is in progress.
NOTE
Press and hold
If style accompaniment is on
and track [A] has not yet been
recorded, the style track [A] will
automatically be selected for
recording when a melody track
is selected. If you only want to
record a melody track, be sure
to turn the style track [A] off.
NOTE
Record Your Own Performance
62 Owner’s Manual
3
Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.
4
Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC]
button.
When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001
and the recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a box
border.
5
Save the song.
When recording is stopped a message asking if you want to save
the song will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to save the song, or
the [-/NO] button if you don’t want to save the song. If saved, the
song will be stored as a MIDI file in song number 031–035.
If you press the [-/NO] button in response to the confirmation message
the song will not be saved as a MIDI file but will remain in the instru-
ment’s memory until the power is turned off, so you have the option of
converting the song to a MIDI file and saving it later. To do this press
and hold the [REC] button until the save confirmation message appears,
then press the [+/YES] button.
If the memory becomes full dur-
ing recording a warning mes-
sage will appear and recording
will stop automatically. Use the
song clear or track clear (page
63) function to delete unwanted
data and make more room avail-
able for recording, then do the
recording again.
NOTE
Recording
starts
Current measure
If you press the [INTRO/END-
ING/rit.] button while recording
a style track, an appropriate
ending pattern will play and then
recording will stop.
NOTE
or
The recorded Song data will
be lost if you turn the power
to the instrument off without
executing the Save operation.
CAUTION
Record Your Own Performance
Owner’s Manual 63
6
When the recording is done ...
To Play Back a User Song
User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 32).
1 Press the [SONG] button from the MAIN display.
2 The current song number/name will be highlighted—use the dial
to select the user song (031–035) you want to play.
3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback.
To save a User Song to USB flash memory page 99.
This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).
1
From the SONG SELECT display select the user song
(031–035) you want to clear.
2
Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer
than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.
To Record Other Tracks
Repeat steps 2 through 5 to record any of the remaining tracks.
By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5],
[A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded
tracks (the border around the track number will appear in the display). You
can also mute previously recorded tracks (the border around the track
number disappears in the display) while recording new tracks.
To Re-record a Track
Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal
way.
The new material will overwrite the previous data.
Data that cannot be recorded
Split voice
The following items are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes
made during the song will not be recorded.
Time signature, Style number, Style volume
Song Clear—Deleting User Songs
If you only want to clear a spe-
cific track from a user song use
the Track Clear function.
NOTE
Hold for longer
than a second
Press and hold
Record Your Own Performance
64 Owner’s Manual
3
Press the [+] button to clear the song.
The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while
the song is being cleared.
This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song.
1
From the SONG SELECT display select the user song
(031–035) you want to clear.
2
Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5],
[A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for
longer than a second.
A confirmation message will appear on the display.
You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.
3
Press the [+] button to clear the track.
The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while
the track is being cleared.
Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song
Hold for longer
than a second
Owner’s Manual 65
Backup and Initialization
The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you
want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below.
This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default set-
tings. The following initialization procedures are provided.
Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user set-
ting, registration memory—turn the power on by pressing the power
switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed
up data will be erased and the default values restored.
Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To clear User Songs as well as Song, Style, and Music Database files
that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer,
turn the power on by pressing the power switch while simultaneously
holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest
black keys.
Backup
The Backup Parameters
•Registration Memory
FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume,
Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Language Selection,
Sustain, Sound Type, Chord Fingering
Initialization
Power switch
When you execute the Flash
Clear operation, data you
have purchased will also be
cleared. Be sure to save data
you want to keep to a com-
puter.
CAUTION
Power switch
66 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
Overall control is based on the following simple operations.
1 Press a button to select a basic function.
Basic Operation
1 Press a button to select a basic function.
2 Use the dial to select an item or value.
3 Start a function.
2 Select an item or value.1 Select a basic function.3 Start a function.
Display (pages 68, 69)
Rotate counter-
clockwise to lower
the volume.
Rotate clockwise to
increase the vol-
ume.
Volume Adjustment
Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the
instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones
plugged into the PHONES jack.
Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson.
Select an auto-accompaniment style.
Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard.
Basic Operation
Owner’s Manual 67
2 Use the dial to select an item or value
When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be listed in the display.
You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item.
Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
3 Start a function.
This is the [START/STOP] button.
Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE]
button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm).
The currently selected item is high-
lighted in the display. In this example the
[VOICE] button has been pressed.
Dial
Rotate the dial clockwise to
increase the value of the selected
item, or counterclockwise to
decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial
continuously to continuously
increase or decrease the value.
[+] and [-] Buttons
Press the [+] button briefly to incre-
ment the value by 1, or press the [-]
button briefly to decrement the
value by 1. Press and hold either
button to continuously increment or
decrement the value in the corre-
sponding direction.
Number Buttons [0]–[9]
The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song num-
ber or parameter value.
Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see
below).
Decrease Increase
Press briefly
to decre-
ment.
Press briefly
to incre-
ment.
Example: Song number “003”
can be entered in three ways.
•[0] [0] [3]
•[0] [3]
(“003” will appear on the dis-
play after a brief delay)
•[3]
(“003” will appear on the dis-
play after a brief delay)
Press number buttons
[0], [0], [3].
CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]
buttons
When selecting a song, style, or voice,
you can use these buttons to jump to the
first item in the next or previous cate-
gory.
The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for select-
ing categorized items, as in the example below.
Example: VOICE SELECT Display
In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if
you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select
the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or
[+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly
handy when you have to select from a large number of voices.
f
r
Jump to the first item
in the next or previ-
ous category.
f
r
The first voice in the selected
category is selected.
Select the category shown
here.
CATEGORY button [ ] mark.
r
CATEGORY button [ ] mark.
f
f
r
In most procedures described throughout this owner’s
manual the dial is recommended for selection simply
because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection
method. Please note however, that most items or values
that can be selected using the dial can also be selected
using the [+] and [-] buttons.
Basic Operation
68 Owner’s Manual
Display Names
All operations are carried out while watching the display. A number of display types are provided for differ-
ent modes and functions. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display.
MAIN Display
FUNCTION Display (page 92)
The FUNCTION display provides access to 49 utility functions.
The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you
can use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons (page 67) to select 49 different groups of functions. Press the
CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the
dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the number [0]–[9] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required.
The Displays
To Return To the MAIN Display
Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN
display.
You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the
[EXIT] button near the lower right corner of the display panel.
The “Press & Hold” Symbol
The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that
the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call
up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a
range of functions.
Title
f
r
Function item
Value
Basic Operation
Owner’s Manual 69
The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.
It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.
MAIN Display Items
* Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on
the panel of the instrument for optimum
display legibility.
Transpose
Tempo
A-B Repeat
Appears when repeat
playback is engaged.
Measure Number
Function ON/Off Icons
Dual
Appears when the Dual Voice is
on. When this icon is showing a
second voice is “layered” on and
played with the main voice.
Split
Appears when the Split Voice is
on. When this icon is showing
different voices can be played to
the left and right of the keyboard
split point.
Performance assistant technology
Appears when the performance
assistant technology is on.
Harmony
Appears when Harmony is on.
When this icon is showing har-
mony notes will be added to the
main voice.
File Control
When this icon is showing you
can control file operations.
Chord
Display
Style (Auto-accompaniment)
Status (page 27)
Appears when the [ACMP ON/
OFF] button is pressed to turn
accompaniment on after selecting
a style. When showing the key-
board range to the left of the split
point is used for accompaniment
chord recognition.
Appears when the synchro-stop
function is engaged.
The style pattern name.
Registration Memory
Status (page 90)
Shows the selected bank
number.
Shows the memory num-
bers that contain data. A
border appears around
the selected number.
Song Track Status
(pages 60, 89)
Highlighted during user song
recording.
The track(s) selected for
recording are highlighted dur-
ing user-song recording. Only
tracks that contain data are dis-
played. A border appears
around a selected track that is
being played. No border
appears around a Muted track.
70 Owner’s Manual
Play with a Variety of Effects
This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.
1
Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button
to turn Harmony feature on.
To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY
ON/OFF] button again.
2
Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/
OFF] button for longer than a second.
The currently selected harmony type will be
displayed.
3
Use the dial to select a harmony type.
Refer to the
Effect Type List
on page 137 for
information about the available harmony types.
Try playing the keyboard with the harmony
function. The effect and operation of each Har-
mony Type is different-refer to the below section
“How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as
the Effect Type List for details.
Adding Harmony
When harmony
is on the har-
mony icon will
appear in the
display.
When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature
on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main
voice is automatically selected.
NOTE
Hold for longer
than a second.
The currently selected harmony type
The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual
or Split Voices.
The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony
notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit).
NOTE
How to sound each Harmony Type
Harmony type 01 to 10, 13
Harmony type 15 to 18 (Echo)
Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the
auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the
Auto Accompaniment is on (page 27).
Keep holding
down the keys.
Harmony type 19 to 22 (Tremolo)
Harmony type 23 to 26 (Trill)
You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function
Settings (page 94).
Keep holding
down the keys.
Hold down two
keys.
Reference
Owner’s Manual 71
Play with a Variety of Effects
Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience.
When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you
want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. Refer to the Effect Type List on
page 138 for information about the available reverb types.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up
the FUNCTION display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Reverb Type item.
3
Use the dial to select a reverb type.
You can check how the selected reverb type
sounds by playing on the keyboard.
Refer to the Effect Type List on page 138 for
information about the available reverb types.
Adjusting the Reverb Level
You can individually adjust the amount of reverb
that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.
(See page 93).
Adding Reverb
f
r
Reverb Type item
Selected reverb type.
72 Owner’s Manual
Play with a Variety of Effects
The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison.
When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If
you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up
the FUNCTION display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Chorus Type item.
3
Use the dial to select a chorus type.
You can check how the selected chorus type
sounds by playing on the keyboard.
Adjusting the Chorus Level
You can individually adjust the amount of chorus
that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.
(See page 93).
Adding Chorus
f
r
Chorus Type item
Selected chorus type.
Owner’s Manual 73
Play with a Variety of Effects
DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor. The DSP effect can be added to the Main and
Dual Voices. These range from reverb-like ambience effects to distortion and other dynamic processing
tools that let you enhance the sound, or completely transform it.
1
Use the [DSP ON/OFF] button to turn
the DSP function on.
The indicator lights when DSP is on.
To turn DSP off, press the [DSP ON/OFF] but-
ton again.
2
Press and hold the [DSP ON/OFF] but-
ton for longer than a second.
The currently selected DSP type will be dis-
played.
3
Use the dial to select a DSP type.
Refer to the DSP Type List on page 140 for
information about the available DSP types.
Adjusting the DSP Level
You can individually adjust the amount of DSP that
is applied to the main and dual voices.
(See page 93).
Adding DSP
When DSP is turned on, the optimum DSP type for the current Voice
is automatically selected.
The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when turning
DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The amount of change dif-
fers depending on the selected Voice.
The DSP type is an overall setting–only one type can be selected.
For this reason, when you play a newly loaded Song or Style, for
example, the currently playing Voices may not sound as expected.
This is normal, since the Song or Style has its own DSP type which
replaces any selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phe-
nomenon occurs when you use the [FF], [REW] buttons or A-B
Repeat function during song playback.
NOTE
DSP Type
Hold for longer
than a second
Currently selected DSP type.
74 Owner’s Manual
Play with a Variety of Effects
This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all
times, regardless of damper operation. The sustain function does not affect split voice.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up
the FUNCTION display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Sustain item.
The current setting is displayed.
3
You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons
to turn sustain on or off.
Adding Sustain
f
r
The sustain of some voices may not be markedly affected when the
sustain function is turned on.
NOTE
Owner’s Manual 75
Handy Performance Features
You can start the song/style by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times
for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during song
playback by pressing the button just twice.
You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
The currently selected function will appear in
the display.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Touch Sensitivity
item.
The currently selected touch sensitivity will be
displayed.
3
Use the dial to select a touch sensitivity
setting between 1 and 3. Higher values
produce greater (easier) volume varia-
tion in response to keyboard dynamics
—i.e. greater sensitivity.
A setting of “4” results in a fixed touch
response, or no level change no matter how
hard or how soft you play the keys.
Tap Start
Touch Response Sensitivity
f
r
Touch Sensitivity item
The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.
NOTE
76 Owner’s Manual
Handy Performance Features
Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting
feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select
voice number “000” to activate this feature.
1
Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2
on page 17).
2
Select and play back any song (steps 1
to 3 on page 33).
3
Play the keyboard and remember the
sound of the voice.
If you have stopped playback at some point
during this procedure press the [START/STOP]
button to start playback again.
4
Use the dial to change songs, then play
the keyboard and listen to the voice.
You should hear a different keyboard voice
than you played in step 3. Watch the display
while changing songs and you will see that dif-
ferent voices are selected for each song.
One Touch Setting
Use the dial to select
voice number 000.
Owner’s Manual 77
Handy Performance Features
Select a sound type for the internal speakers from piano sound or style sound.
1
Press and hold the [PIANO PRESET]
button for longer than a second.
The currently selected sound type will appear.
2
Use the dial to select the desired Sound
Type.
Select Piano when you want to play only a
piano sound, or select Style when you want to
play a style.
This function can also be set by using the
[FUNCTION] button (see page 93).
Select a Sound Type
Hold for longer
than a second.
The currently selected
sound type.
When using headphones the normal sound is applied.
NOTE
78 Owner’s Manual
Handy Performance Features
Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)
The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted
up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone
increments.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Transpose item.
3
Use the dial to set the transpose value
between -12 and +12 as required.
Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)
The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted
up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent
increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Tuning item.
3
Use the dial to set the tuning value
between -100 and +100 as required.
Pitch Controls
f
r
Transpose item
Can be set between -12 and +12
The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.
NOTE
f
r
Can be set between -100 and +100
Tuning item
The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.
NOTE
Owner’s Manual 79
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 26 of
the Quick Guide.
Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-
dure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more.
This instrument features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the
accompaniment to match the song you are playing.
INTRO section
This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the
main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
MAIN section
This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats
indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A
and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left
hand.
Fill-in section
This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.
ENDING section
This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops
automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.
Pattern Variation (Sections)
Main A/BIntro
Auto fillEnding
80 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
1
Press the [STYLE] button and then
select a style.
2
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to
turn auto accompaniment on.
3
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn
synchro start on.
4
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
You’re now ready to play the intro.
6
As soon as you play a chord with your
left hand, the Intro of the selected Style
starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as
shown below). For information on how to enter
chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment
Chords” on page 31.
Synchro Start
When the synchro start standby mode is engaged,
style playback will begin as soon as you play a
chord in the accompaniment range of the
keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start
standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START]
button again.
Appears when auto
accompaniment is on.
The indicator will flash when the
synchro start standby mode will
be engaged.
The name of the selected sec-
tion—MAIN A or MAIN B—will
be displayed.
Split point
Accompaniment range
Owner’s Manual 81
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
7
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.
When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly
into the selected main section A/B.
8
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
This switches to the ending section.
When the ending is finished, the auto accompa-
niment stops automatically. You can have the
ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by
pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button
again while the ending is playing back.
Synchro Stop
When this function is selected the accompaniment
style will only play while you are playing chords
in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.
Style playback will stop when you release the
keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC
STOP] button.
The style will play
while you are playing
the keys
Style playback will
stop when you
release the keys
82 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
The initial default split point is key number 054 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using
the procedure described below.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Split point item.
3
Use the dial to set the split point to any
key from 021(A-1) through 108 (C7).
Setting the Split Point
021
(A-1)
024
(C0)
036
(C1)
048
(C2)
060
(C3)
072
(C4)
084
(C5)
096
(C6)
108
(C7)
Split point (054: F#2)
Main voice
Split voice
f
r
When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point
also changes.
The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.
The split voice sounds when the split-point key is played.
NOTE
•You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION]
button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the
item (page 92).
f
r
NOTE
Owner’s Manual 83
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play
chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the
accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the
instrument can be used (page 31).
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn
auto accompaniment on after pressing the
[STYLE] button.
Press the [STYLE] button to engage the
style function.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Style Volume item.
3
Use the dial to set the style volume
between 000 and 127.
Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)
Appears when auto
accompaniment is
on
Accompaniment range
Adjusting the Style Volume
f
r
84 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.
The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the
root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad,
for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the
C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale).
In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the
chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for
the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and
anchors the other chord notes.
The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.
The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad
is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two addi-
tional chords, as shown below.
The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create
different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by
choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).
Reading Chord Names
Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord
(other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the
chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a
major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance.
Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by this instrument.)
Chord Basics
3rd
3rd
Root
Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones)
CM Cm Caug Cdim
Major chord
Minor 3rd
Major 3rd
Major 3rd
Minor 3rd
Major 3rd
Major 3rd
Minor 3rd
Minor 3rd
Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord
Cm
Root note Chord type
Csus4 C7 Cm7 CM7
C7
(
b5
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
C7sus4
CmM7
Perfect 5
th
Perfect 4
th
Flatted 7
th
Major chord Flatted 7
th
Minor chord Major 7
th
Major chord
Major 7
th
Minor chord Flatted 5
th
7
th
chord
Flatted 5
th
Minor 7
th
chord
Flatted 7
th
Suspended
4
th
chord
Suspended 4
th
7
th
Minor 7
th
Major 7
th
7
th
, suspended 4
th
Minor 7
th
, flatted 5
th
7
th
, flatted 5
th
Minor/major 7
th
Owner’s Manual 85
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
Recognized Standard Chords● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.
* These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function.
Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display
Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C
Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C
9
Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6
Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6
9
*
Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7
Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7
9
*
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7
CM7
#11
*
Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C
b5
*
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7
b5
*
Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4
Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5Caug
Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug *
Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm
Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm9
Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6
Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7Cm7
Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7Cm7
9
Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7
11
*
Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7
Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7
9
*
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7Cm7
b5
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7
b5
*
Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5Cdim
Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7
Seventh [7]
1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - b7
C7
Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
b9
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7C7
b13
Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
9
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]
1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7
C7
#11
Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7C7
13
Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7
#9
Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7
b5
*
Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7C7aug
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - b7C7sus4
Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 Csus2 *
C
C
(
9
)
C6
(
9
)
C6
CM7
CM7
(
9
)
CM7
(
#11
)
C
(
b5
)
CM7
(
b5
)
Csus4
Caug
CM7aug
Cm
(
9
)
Cm
Cm6
Cm7
Cm7
(
11
)
CmM7
CmM7
(
9
)
Cm7
(
b5
)
CmM7
(
b5
)
Cdim7
C7
C7
(
b9
)
C7
(
b13
)
(
9
)
C7
(
#11
)
C7
(
13
)
C7
(
#9
)
C7
C7b5
C7aug
C7sus4
Csus2
Notes in parentheses can be omitted.
Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompa-
niment based only on the root.
•A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root
and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords.
The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions
can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7
b
5, 6, m6, sus4,
aug, dim7, 7
b
5, 6(9), sus2.
NOTE
•Inversion of the m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in
parentheses are omitted.
The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related
chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the
minor seventh).
•Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played
chord.
NOTE
86 Owner’s Manual
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
In “Play Along with a Style” on page 27 we described a method of playing styles in which chords were
detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By making the settings described below, however,
chord detection for style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even
more dynamic style performance. In this mode only chords played in the normal way (page 31) can be
detected.
1
Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] but-
ton for longer than a second to select
the function “Chord Fingering”.
2
Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”.
Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard
Hold for longer
than a second
Owner’s Manual 87
Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions
The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords.
It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.
1
Press and hold the LESSON [START]
button for longer than a second.
2
As an example, we’ll learn how to play a
GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the
“G” key in the section of the keyboard
labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t
sound.) The root note you set is shown
in the display.
3
Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in
the section of the keyboard labeled
“CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t
sound.) The notes you should play for
the specified chord (root note and
chord type) are shown in the display,
both as notation and in the keyboard
diagram.
To call up possible inversions of the chord,
press the [+]/[-] buttons.
4
Try playing a chord in the auto accom-
paniment section of the keyboard,
checking the indications in the display.
When you’ve played the chord properly,
a bell sound signals your success and
the chord name in the display flash.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary
Hold for longer
than a second
Notation of chord Chord name (root and type)
Individual notes of chord (keyboard)
About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only
by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when
specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after
pressing the root note.
Be aware that the chord types explained here are the left-hand
notes applied to various styles and different from the one for the per-
formance assistant technology feature.
NOTE
88 Owner’s Manual
Song Settings
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Song Volume item.
3
Use the dial to set the song volume
between 000 and 127.
You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the
start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat
playback.
1
Play the song (page 32) and press the
[A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning
of the section you want to repeat (the
“A” point).
2
Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec-
ond time at the end of the section you
want to repeat (the “B” point).
3
The specified A-B section of the song
will now play repeatedly.
You can stop repeat playback at any time by
pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.
Song Volume
f
r
Can be set between 000 and 127
Song volume item
Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.
NOTE
A-B Repeat
AB
Repeat start and end points cannot be specified within the same
measure While the song is stopped.
The current measure number is shown in the display during play-
back.
If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song
press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song.
NOTE
Owner’s Manual 89
Song Settings
Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the
song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.
You can mute individual tracks and play the muted
part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute
tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. To
mute a track, press the appropriate track button
(TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same but-
ton a second time to disengage track muting.
You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer.
Press the lesson [L] and [R] buttons simul-
taneously so that “LR” appears in the
upper right corner of the MAIN display.
Select the song and play it.
1
Press the [VOICE] button for longer
than a second.
The VOICE SELECT (MELODY R or MEL-
ODY L) display will appear so you can select
the Melody R or Melody L voice. Pressing the
[VOICE] button alternates between VOICE
SELECT MELODY R and MELODY L.
2
Use the dial to select the voice.
As you select different melody voices, only the
melody voice changes while the song will
remain the same.
Muting Independent Song Parts
Track number with border ... track contains data and is not muted.
No track number ... no data.
Track number without border
... track contains data but is muted.
Change the Melody Voice
Hold for longer
than a second
90 Owner’s Manual
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings
This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-
tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved
(8 banks of two setups each).
1
Set the panel controls as required—
select a voice, accompaniment style,
etc.
2
Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A
bank number will appear in the display
when you release the button.
3
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-
tons to select a bank number from 1 to
8.
4
Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2]
button while holding the [MEMORY/
BANK] button to store the current panel
settings to the specified registration
memory.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display in order to check the bank and registra-
tion memory numbers.
8 Banks
Memory 1
Up to 16 presets (eight
banks of two each) can
be memorized.
Memory 2
Saving to the Registration Memory
Bank number
Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song play-
back.
NOTE
Bank number
•You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration
memory button into USB flash memory as the user file or to a com-
puter as the backup file.
NOTE
If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains
data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.
NOTE
Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registra-
tion memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.
CAUTION
Owner’s Manual 91
Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings
1
Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A
bank number will appear in the display
when you release the button.
2
Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-
tons to select bank you want to recall.
You can check whether the panel settings are
stored in registration memory 1 or 2 by press-
ing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
3
Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1]
or [2], containing the settings you want
to recall. The panel controls will be
instantly set accordingly.
Recalling a Registration Memory
Bank number
Settings That Can be Saved to the Registra-
tion Memory
Style settings*
Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,
Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B),
Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering
Voice settings
Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,
Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP
Level),
Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice
number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,
Chorus Level, DSP Level),
Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF,
Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,
Reverb Level, Chorus Level)
Effect settings
Reverb Type, Chorus Type,
Sustain ON/OFF, DSP ON/OFF, DSP Type
Harmony settings
Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type,
Harmony Volume
Other settings
Transpose
* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when
using the Song features.
92 Owner’s Manual
The Functions
The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-
ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the func-
tion list starting on the opposite page. There are 49 function parameters in all.
When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display
name and adjust as required.
1
Find the function you want to set in the
list that begins on page 93.
2
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
3
Select a function.
Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as
many times as necessary until the function’s
display name appears in the display.
4
Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or
the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the
selected function as required.
The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/
OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF.
In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-
tion of the selected function, and the [-] will
cancel the selection.
Some Function settings are stored in memory
as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup
Parameters” on page 65 for information on the
function settings that are stored on the instru-
ment.
To restore all initial factor default settings per-
form the “Backup Clear” procedure described
in the “Initialization” section on page 65.
Selecting and Setting Functions
f
r
Previous itemFunction category Next item
The selected function
Value
Direct numeric
entry.
•Increment value by 1.
•ON
•Execute
Decrement value by 1.
OFF
Cancel
Press simultaneously to
recall the default setting.
Owner’s Manual 93
The Functions
Function Setting List
Category Function Item Range/Settings Description
VOLUME
Style Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.
Song Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.
OVERALL
Transpose -12–+12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments.
Tuning -100–+100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.
Split Point 021(A-1)–108(C7)
Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in
other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper)
voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are
automatically set to the same value.
Touch Sensitivity
1(Soft), 2(Medium),
3(Hard), 4 (Off)
Determines the sensitivity of the feature.
Chord Fingering
1(Multi Finger),
2(FullKeyboard)
Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal
chords and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In
the Full Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard
will be detected, and the notes played will be sound as well.
MAIN VOICE
Main Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice.
Main Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice.
Main Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results
in the sound being panned full right.
Main Reverb Level 000–127
Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
Main Chorus Level 000–127
Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
Main DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect.
DUAL VOICE
Dual Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice.
Dual Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.
Dual Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results
in the sound being panned full right.
Dual Reverb Level 000–127
Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
Dual Chorus Level 000–127
Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
Dual DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect.
SPLIT VOICE
Split Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice.
Split Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.
Split Pan
000 (left)–
64 (center)–
127 (right)
Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The
value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results
in the sound being panned full right.
Split Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect.
Split Chorus Level 000–127
Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus
effect.
EFFECT
Reverb Type 01–36 Determines the Reverb type, including off. (See the list on page 138)
Chorus Type 01–45 Determines the Chorus type, including off. (See the list on page 139)
DSP Type 001–239 Determines the DSP type, including off. (See the list on page 140)
Sustain ON/OFF
Determines whether or not sustain is always applied to the MAIN/DUAL
voices. It is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. (page
74)
Sound Type Piano/Style
Determines the sound type, optimizing it either for a simple, pure piano
sound, or for a wide, dynamic multi-instrument style sound.
94 Owner’s Manual
The Functions
*All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously.
(The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)
HARMONY
Harmony Type 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 137)
Harmony Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.
PAT P.A.T. Type
CHORD,
CHORD/FREE,
MELODY,
CHORD/MELODY
Determines the performance assistant technology feature type. (See the list
on page 39)
PC PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 105).
MIDI
Local ON/OFF
Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone
generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 105)
External Clock ON/OFF
Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock
(OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 105)
Keyboard Out ON/OFF
Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is
transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).
Style Out ON/OFF
Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)
during Style playback.
Song Out ON/OFF
Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)
during Song playback.
Initial Setup YES/NO
Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to
send, or press [-] to cancel.
METRONOME
Time Signature -
Numerator
01–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.
Time Signature -
Denominator
2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat.
Bell ON/OFF Determines whether a bell accent will be sounded (ON) or not (OFF).
Metronome Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.
SCORE Quantize
1(1/4 note),
2(1/4 note triplet),
3(1/8 note),
4(1/8 note triplet),
5(1/16 note),
6(1/16 note triplet),
7(1/32 note),
8(1/32 note triplet)
Depending on the song data, you can make the score more readable by
adjusting the timing of the notes.
This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the song. For
example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the song, you
should set this value to “eighth note”. Any notes or rests shorter than this
value will not be shown in the score.
LESSON
Right-Part GuideTrack 1–16
Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting
is effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer.
Left-Part GuideTrack 1–16
Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is
effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer.
Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.
UTILITY Demo Cancel ON/OFF
Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON,
the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed.
LANGUAGE Language English/Japanese
Determines the display language for the demo displays, song file names,
lyrics and certain display messages. All other messages and names are
displayed in English. When this is set to Japanese, the file names are
displayed in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language
setting originally made in the song data; however, when no such setting
exists, the setting here is used.
Category Function Item Range/Settings Description
Owner’s Manual 95
Saving and Loading Data
USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data.
When a USB flash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal,
registered settings can be saved from or loaded into the instrument. USB flash mem-
ory can also be used to transfer Song, Style, and Music Database files to the instru-
ment, where they can be selected and used in the same way as the internal data.
In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash
memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them.
Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO
DEVICE terminal” section on page 96.
1
Connect a USB flash memory to the
USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful
to insert it with the proper orientation.
2
Check that the file control icon is shown
in the MAIN display.
You can go to the FILE CONTROL display
from which you can access file operations by
pressing the [MENU] button from this display.
(Do not press this button now, but only when
instructed to in the sections below.)
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
A message (information or confirmation dialog)
sometimes appears on the display to facilitate
operation. Refer to the “Messages” on page 112
for an explanation of each message.
Menu Reference Page
Format 97
User File Save 98
User Song Save 99
Load 100
USB Delete 101
User Delete 102
File Control Icon
Appears while the
memory device is
being mounted.
No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE
CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related
to file functions will be active.
NOTE
The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following
cases:
During style or song playback.
During a lesson.
While data is being loaded from a USB flash memory.
NOTE
96 Owner’s Manual
Saving and Loading Data
Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal
This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to
handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below.
Compatible USB devices
USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive)
The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-
cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee
operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur-
chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please
visit the following web page:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Connecting USB device
When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE
terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is
appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direc-
tion.
Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard,
you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with
the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is
that of USB 1.1.
Using USB Storage Devices
By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you
can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as
well as read data from the connected device.
The number of USB storage device to be used
Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the
USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Formatting USB storage media
When a USB storage device is connected or media is
inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format
the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page
97).
To protect your data (write-protect)
To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,
apply the write-protect provided with each storage device
or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device,
make sure to disable write-protect.
Connecting/removing USB storage device
Before removing the media from the device, make sure that
the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save
and Delete operations).
Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.
NOTE
Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot
be used.
NOTE
Do not close the key cover when a USB device is connected to
the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Doing so can damage the USB
device.
CAUTION
Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instru-
ment, they cannot be used for saving data.
NOTE
The format operation overwrites any previously existing data.
Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain
important data.
CAUTION
•Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage
device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often.
Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freez-
ing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data
(such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or
is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connec-
tion), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the
media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either
device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both
devices.
CAUTION
Owner’s Manual 97
Saving and Loading Data
New USB flash memory must be formatted before they can be used by this instrument.
1
After connecting the USB flash memory
to be formatted to the instrument’s USB
TO DEVICE terminal, check that the
icon is showing in the MAIN display.
2
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-
ton.
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to select the Format item.
The display prompts you for confirmation.
4
Press the [EXECUTE] button and the
display prompts you for confirmation.
You can press the [-] button at this point to can-
cel the operation.
5
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+] button, and the format operation
will begin.
6
A message will appear on the display to
inform you that the operation has fin-
ished.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Formatting USB Flash Memory
If you format a USB flash memory that already contains data, all of
the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data
when using the format function.
CAUTION
f
r
Once the format-in-progress message appears on the display
the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the
power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation.
CAUTION
If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate
message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-
cute the operation.
NOTE
98 Owner’s Manual
Saving and Loading Data
This operation saves Registration Memory data as a “User File” to a USB flash memory device. The User
File name will have a “.usr” extension which will not appear in the instrument’s display.
1
Make sure that a properly formatted
USB flash memory has been properly
connected to the instrument’s USB TO
DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is
showing in the MAIN display.
2
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button.
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to locate the Regist Save item.
A default file name will automatically be cre-
ated.
4
Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor
will appear below the first character in
the file name.
5
Change the file name as necessary.
The [-] button moves the cursor to the left,
and the [0] button moves it to the right.
• Use the dial to select a character for the cur-
rent cursor location.
• The [+] button deletes the character at the
cursor location.
6
Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-
play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the save operation at this point
by pressing the [-] button.
7
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+] button, and the save operation
will begin.
The file will be stored to the USER FILE folder
in the USB flash memory.
8
A message will appear on the display to
inform you that the operation has fin-
ished.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Saving Registration Memory data to USB Flash Memory
To Overwrite an Existing File
If you want to overwrite a file that already exists
on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the
[+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip
ahead to step 6.
f
r
Up to 100 user files can be saved to a single USB flash memory.
If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate
message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-
cute the operation.
If there is not enough capacity left on the USB flash memory to save
the data an appropriate message will appear on the display and you
will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted files from the USB
flash memory to make more memory available (page 101), or use a
different USB flash memory.
Refer to the “Messages” list on page 112 for other possible errors
that might prevent you from completing the operation.
NOTE
Cursor
Cursor right
Delete characterCursor left
The dial selects
characters
Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.
CAUTION
If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confir-
mation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-]
to cancel.
The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will
depend on the condition of the USB flash memory.
NOTE
Owner’s Manual 99
Saving and Loading Data
This operation saves a user song (song numbers 031–035) to USB flash memory.
1
Make sure that a properly formatted
USB flash memory has been properly
connected to the instrument’s USB TO
DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is
showing in the MAIN display.
2
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-
ton.
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to locate the User Song Save item.
The SOURCE FILE—a user song name—will
be highlighted.
4
Use the dial to select the source user
song.
You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simulta-
neously to select the first user song.
5
Press the [EXECUTE] button.
The DESTINATION SONG will be high-
lighted, and a default name will automatically
be created.
6
Press the [EXECUTE] button.
A cursor will appear below the first character in
the file name.
7
Change the file name as necessary.
Refer to “Saving Registration Memory data to
USB Flash Memory” on page 98 for filename
entry.
8
Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-
play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the save operation at this point
by pressing the [-] button.
9
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+] button, and the save operation
will begin.
The user song will be stored to the USER FILE
folder in the USB flash memory.
10
A message will appear on the display
to inform you that the operation has
finished.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Save a User Song to USB Flash Memory
To Overwrite an Existing File
If you want to overwrite a file that already exists
on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the
[+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip
ahead to step 7.
f
r
The source user song name.
The name of the file to
be saved
Cursor
Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.
CAUTION
If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confir-
mation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-]
to cancel.
The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will
depend on the condition of the USB flash memory.
NOTE
100 Owner’s Manual
Saving and Loading Data
User files as well as Style, Song, and Music Database files residing on a USB flash memory can be loaded
into the instrument.
1
With the USB flash memory containing
the file you want to load connected to
the USB TO DEVICE connector, check
that the File Control icon is shown in
the MAIN display.
2
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-
ton.
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to locate the Load item.
4
Use the dial to select the file you want
to load.
All user files in the USB flash memory will be
displayed first, followed by the style files, song
files and music database files.
Files must be located in the “User Files” folder
in the USB flash memory. Files located outside
of that folder will not be recognized.
5
Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-
play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the load operation at this point
by pressing the [-] button.
6
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+] button, and the load operation
will begin.
7
A message will appear on the display to
inform you that the operation has fin-
ished.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Loading Files from a USB Flash Memory
If you load a User File registration memory data will be overwritten
by the newly loaded data. Save important data to a USB flash
memory before loading data that will overwrite it.
CAUTION
f
r
Once the load-in-progress message appears on the display the
operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.
CAUTION
Owner’s Manual 101
Saving and Loading Data
This procedure deletes User, Style, Song, and Music Database files from a USB flash memory.
1
Make sure that the USB flash memory
containing the file(s) you want to delete
has been properly connected to the
instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal,
and that the icon is showing in the
MAIN display.
2
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-
ton.
3
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to locate the USB Delete item.
4
Use the dial to select the file you want
to delete.
All User files in the USB flash memory will be
displayed first, followed by the style files, song
files and music database files.
Files must be located in the “User Files” folder
in the USB flash memory. Files located outside
of that folder will not be recognized.
5
Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-
play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the delete operation at this
point by pressing the [-] button.
6
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+] button, and the delete operation
will begin.
7
A message will appear on the display to
inform you that the operation has fin-
ished.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory
f
r
Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display
the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or
remove the USB flash memory during this operation.
CAUTION
If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate
message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-
cute the operation.
NOTE
102 Owner’s Manual
Saving and Loading Data
This procedure deletes the User Song as well as Style, Song, and Music Database files transferred from an
external device such as a computer. This operation does not erase the preset data.
1
Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-
tons to locate the User Delete item.
Only “User Delete” can be selected if no USB
flash memory is connected to the instrument.
3
Use the dial to select the file you want
to delete.
All user songs will be displayed first, followed
by the song, style and music database files.
4
Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-
play prompts you for confirmation.
You can cancel the delete operation at this
point by pressing the [-] button.
5
Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or
the [+] button, and the delete operation
will begin.
6
A message will appear on the display to
inform you that the operation has fin-
ished.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN
display.
1
Make sure that the USB flash memory
containing the file you want to play has
been properly connected to the instru-
ment’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and
that the icon is showing in the MAIN
display.
2
Press the [SONG], [STYLE] or [MUSIC
DATABASE] button. Files of the corre-
sponding type will be displayed.
3
Use the dial to select the file you want
to play.
4
Play the selected file in the same way
the internal files are played: press the
[START/STOP] button, or play on the
keyboard.
Delete User Data from the Instrument
f
r
Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display
the operation cannot be canceled.
CAUTION
Playing Files Located on a USB Flash Memory
In order to play data copied to a USB flash memory from a com-
puter or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB
flash memory’s root directory or a first-level/second-level folder in
the root directory.
Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a second-level
folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument.
USB flash memory (Root)
Song
File
Song
File
Song
File
Can be selected/played.
Cannot be selected/played.
Song
File
IMPORTANT
Owner’s Manual 103
Connections
q USB TO DEVICE terminal
This terminal allows connection to USB stor-
age devices. Refer to “Precautions when using
the USB TO DEVICE terminal” on page 96.
w USB TO HOST terminal
This terminal allows direct connection to a per-
sonal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Per-
sonal Computer” on page 104 for more
information.
Connectors
USB
TO HOST
w
q
104 Owner’s Manual
Connections
The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.
Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 105).
Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 107).
The connection procedure is as follows:
1
Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com-
puter.
The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM.
Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on
the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”.
2
Connect the USB terminal of the computer to
the USB terminal on the instrument using an
AB type USB cable (USB cable sold sepa-
rately).
The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft
Downloader application that allows you to transfer
song files from your computer to the instrument’s
flash memory. For instructions about how to install
Musicsoft Downloader (refer to included “Acces-
sory CD-ROM Installation Guide”) and how to
transfer song files (refer to page 107).
Precautions when using the USB TO
HOST terminal
When connecting the computer to the USB TO
HOST terminal, make sure to observe the follow-
ing points. Failing to do so risks freezing the com-
puter and corrupting or losing the data. If the
computer or the instrument freezes, restart the
application software or the computer OS, or turn
the power to the instrument off then on again.
Connecting a Personal Computer
USB
TO HOST
USB cable
Computer
USB TO HOST
terminal
Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.
Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal,
exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as sus-
pended, sleep, standby).
Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the com-
puter to the USB TO HOST terminal.
•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument
on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO
HOST] terminal.
Quit any open application software on the computer.
Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru-
ment. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard
or play back a song, etc.)
While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should
wait for six seconds or more between these operations:
(1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or
(2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.
CAUTION
Owner’s Manual 105
Connections
By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the com-
puter, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.
When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance
data.
MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons
to select the item you want to change its
value.
3
Use the dial to select ON or OFF.
Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer
USB
TO HOST
USB cable
USB TO HOST terminal
USB terminal
Computer
Item Range/Settings Description
Local ON/OFF
Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal
tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when
local control is off.
External Clock ON/OFF
These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to
a clock signal from an external device (ON).
Keyboard Out ON/OFF
These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or
not (OFF).
Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.
Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.
If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely may be
caused by Local Control being set to off.
NOTE
If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an
external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start.
NOTE
f
r
106 Owner’s Manual
Connections
PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
A number of MIDI settings need to be made when
you want to transfer performance data between the
computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item
can conveniently make multiple settings for you in
one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,
PC2, and OFF.
This setting is not necessary when transferring
song or backup files between the computer and the
instrument.
* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Note-
book.
1
Press and hold the [DEMO] button for
longer than a second so that the PC
Mode item appears.
2
Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.
You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on
your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the
panel.
Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
To use the remote control functions, simulta-
neously hold down the lowest two keys on the key-
board (A-1 and A#-1) and press the appropriate
key (shown below).
PC1 PC2* OFF
Local OFF OFF ON
External Clock ON OFF OFF
Song Out OFF OFF OFF
Style Out OFF OFF OFF
Keyboard Out OFF ON ON
Hold for longer
than a second.
When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo,
song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.
NOTE
•You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNC-
TION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to
locate it (page 92).
f
r
NOTE
Remote Control of MIDI Devices
A-1
A#-1
C7: Fast forward
B6: Start
A6: Stop
G6: Rewind
F6: Top (move to the begin-
ning of the song)
E6: Metronome ON/OFF
Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2
mode.
NOTE
Owner’s Manual 107
Connections
This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a
sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup
data before the actual performance data.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button.
2
Use the CATEGORY
[] and [ ]
buttons
to select the Initial Send item.
3
Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]
to cancel.
Songs, styles, or Music Database files residing on a
computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be trans-
ferred to the instrument. Backup file can also be
transferred from the instrument to the computer
and back.
In order to transfer files between your computer
and the instrument you will need to install the
Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-
MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM
on your computer. Refer to the included “Acces-
sory CD-ROM Installation Guide” for installation
details.
With the Musicsoft
Downloader You Can.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Transfer files from the computer to the instru-
ment’s flash memory.
refer to the procedure described on
page 108.
The procedure for transferring songs included
on the Accessory CD-ROM from your com-
puter to the instrument is given as an example.
Backup file can be transferred from the instru-
ment to a computer and back.
refer to the procedure described on
page 109.
Initial Send
f
r
Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument
Data that can be transferred from a computer
to this instrument.
• Data Capacity: 1895KB
502 files total for the Song, Style and Music
Database.
• Data Format
Song: .mid SMF format 0/1
Style: .sty
Music Database: .mfd
Backup File: 09DP88.BUP
What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?
The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one
of the most common and widely compatible
sequence formats used for storing sequence
data. There are two variations: Format 0 and
Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are
compatible with SMF Format 0, and most
commercially available MIDI sequence data is
provided in SMF Format 0.
Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with
Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.
108 Owner’s Manual
Connections
Use Musicsoft Downloader
To Transfer Songs From the
Accessory CD-ROM To the
Instrument’s flash memory
● ● ● ● ●
1
Install the Musicsoft Downloader and
USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then
connect the computer and the instru-
ment (refer to “Accessory CD-ROM
Installation Guide”).
2
Insert the included CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive.
A start window will appear automatically.
3
Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader
shortcut icon that is created on the
desktop.
This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader
application and the main window will appear.
4
Click the “Add File” button and the Add
File window will appear.
5
Click the button to the right of “Look in”
and select the CD-ROM drive from the
drop-down menu that appears. Double-
click the “SampleData” Folder on the
window. Select the file from the “Song-
Data” Folder you want to transfer to the
instrument, and click “Open”.
At this point you can select a Style or Music Data-
base file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer
it to the instrument in the same way as a song file.
6
A copy of the selected MIDI song file
will appear in the “List of files stored
temporarily” at the top of the window.
The memory medium will also be displayed at
the bottom of the window to specify the desti-
nation for the transfer. Click “Instrument”, and
then “Flash memory”.
7
After selecting the file in the “List of
files stored temporarily”, click the
downward [Move] button and a confir-
mation message will appear. Click [OK]
and the song will be transferred from
the “List of files stored temporarily” to
the instrument’s memory.
If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.
NOTE
The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader
is running.
NOTE
q Click the CD-ROM drive
w Double-click “SampleData” Folder “Song-
Data” Folder, and click a song file.
e Click “Open”
q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”,
and then “Flash Memory”
Files transferred to a USB flash memory root directory using the
Musicsoft Downloader—any location outside the USER FILES folder
on the USB flash memory device—cannot be deleted via the instru-
ment’s file control display. Use the Musicsoft Downloader delete but-
ton to delete such files.
NOTE
Owner’s Manual 109
Connections
8
Close the window to end the Musicsoft
Downloader.
9
To playback a song stored in flash
memory, press the [SONG] button.
Use the dial to select the song you want
to play, then press the [START/STOP]
button to start playback.
Transfer a Backup file from
the instrument to a computer
● ● ●
You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer
“Backup” files containing Registration Memory and
FUNCTION settings (page 65) to a computer. If you
click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the
Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System
Drive”, a file named “09DP88.BUP” will appear in
the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader
display. This is the backup file. For details about
how to transfer backup files using the Musicsoft
Downloader application, refer to the Online help
“Transferring Data Between the Computer and
Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the applica-
tion.
To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...
In order to use songs (only SMF format 0 and 1)
transferred from a computer for lessons it is
necessary to specify which channels are to be
played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts.
1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song
(036–) residing in flash memory for which you
want to set the guide track.
2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.
3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to
select the R-Part or L-Part item.
4
Use the dial to select the channel you want to
play back as the specified right- or left-hand part.
We recommend that you select channel 1 for the
right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.
End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from
your computer.
NOTE
Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only
will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the
memory media may become unstable and its contents may dis-
appear completely when the power is turned on or off.
CAUTION
Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or
improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a
copy of all important data stored on your computer.
CAUTION
f
r
Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.
NOTE
The backup file is transmitted/received as a single file. As a result,
all registration memory data will be overwritten every time you
transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data.
CAUTION
Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so it will
not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.
CAUTION
110 Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
For the Instrument
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping
sound is temporarily produced.
This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical
power.
When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.
Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may pro-
duce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it
further away from the instrument.
There is no sound even when the keyboard is
played or when a song or style is being played
back.
Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES] jack on the bot-
tom. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is
output.
Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 105.)
Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard,
etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is
showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard
does not produce any sound.
When using the Dictionary function (page 87), the keys in the right
hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type.
The style or song does not play back when the
[START/STOP] button is pressed.
Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;
refer to “External Clock” on page 105.
The style does not sound properly.
Make sure that the Style Volume (page 93) is set to an appropriate
level.
Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are play-
ing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 82).
Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing
press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.
No rhythm accompaniment plays when the
[START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting
style number 131 or a style between 143–160
(Pianist).
This is not a malfunction. Style number 131 and style numbers 143–
160 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other
parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment
range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on.
Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound
seems to be cut off.
The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 64 notes. If the
Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing
back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “sto-
len”) from the accompaniment or song.
The damper pedal has no effect even when
damper pedal is pressed.
The pedal cord may not be properly connected. Make sure securely
insert the pedal cord into the [PEDAL] jack (page 116).
The sound of the voice changes from note to note.
This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple
recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the key-
board; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different
from note to note.
The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or
there are Japanese characters in the display mes-
sages.
Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to
English. (See page 16)
The appropriate display does not appear when the
[SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], or
[VOICE] button is pressed.
Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return
to the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons.
Appendix
Owner’s Manual 111
Troubleshooting
The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is
played.
Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.
Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off.
The ACMP indicator does not appear when the
[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.
Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when
you are going to use any style-related function.
There is no harmony sound.
The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their
type. Types 01–10, 13 function when style playback is on, chords are
played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is
played in the right-hand range. Types 15–26 will function whether
style playback is on or off. For types 23–26 you need to play two
notes at the same time.
The “OverCurrent” message is shown in the upper
area of the MAIN display and the USB device
does not respond.
Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of
the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the
USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
112 Owner’s Manual
Messages
LCD Message Comment
Access error!
Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the flash
memory.
All Memory Clearing...
Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power
off during data transmission.
Are you sure? Confirms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not.
Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the flash memory.
Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled.
Can’t clear TrackA. Displayed when a track clear error occurs.
Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs.
Com Mode
Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected
to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played
back.
Completed
Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmis-
sion.
Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application.
Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data.
Delete File Displayed while deleting a file in the Musicsoft Downloader.
Delete OK ? Confirms whether the Delete job is executed or not.
Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader.
Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged.
End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed.
Error! Displayed when writing has failed.
Exit.
Displayed when the record standby mode is exited because an inappropri-
ate style has been selected during style record standby.
“File information area is not large enough.
Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total
number of files have become too many.
File is not found. Indicates there is no file.
“File too large. Loading is impossible.
Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too
large.
Flash Clearing...
Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal
flash memory.
Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Confirms whether formatting the media is executed or not.
Formatting... Displayed while formatting.
Load OK ? Confirms whether loading is executed or not.
Loading... Displayed while loading data.
Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted.
Media capacity is full.
Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory
becomes full.
Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during song recording.
“MIDI receive buffer overflow.
Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to
proceed.
Move File Displayed while moving a file in the Musicsoft Downloader.
“Now Writing...
(Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise
the data may be damaged.)”
Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while
writing. Doing so may result in data loss.
Owner’s Manual 113
Messages
OverCurrent
Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the
overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO
DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.
Overwrite ? Confirms whether overwriting is executed or not.
Please Wait...
Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying
scores and lyrics, or stopping recording.
Rename File Displayed while rewriting the file name in the Musicsoft Downloader.
Save OK ? Confirms whether saving is executed or not.
Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist.
Saving...
Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while
saving. Doing so may result in data loss.
Send OK? Confirms whether the data transmission is executed or not.
Sending... Displayed while transmitting data.
“Since the media is in use now, this
function is not available.
Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the
media is being accessed.
Style data is too large to load. Indicates that style data cannot be loaded since the style data is too large.
Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconfirms whether each operation is executed or not.
“The limit of the media has been reached.
Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory
structure has become too complicated.
The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted.
“The media is write-protected.
Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-pro-
tected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use.
“The song data is too large to be
converted to notation.
Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too
large.
There are too many files.
Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files
exceeds the capacity.
“This function is not available now.
Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is
executing another job.
[nnn] “file name”
Indicates the file name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the
receiving block.
LCD Message Comment
Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages neces-
sary to be explained only.
NOTE
114 Owner’s Manual
Keyboard Stand Assembly
Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the
sequence given below.
Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
Assemble the stand on a hard and flat floor with ample space.
Be sure to use the included screws only, and insert screws of the correct size in the correct hole locations. Do not use any other
screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product.
Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit.
•To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.
CAUTION
Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready
A
B
C
D
E
6 x 20 mm long screws (x 4)
Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items.
Bundled pedal cord inside
Foamed styrol pads
6 x 16 mm short screws (x 4)
4 x 12 mm thin screws (x 2)
4 x 20 mm tapping screws (x 4)
4 x 10 mm thin screws (x 2)
AC power cord (x 1)
Headphone hanger (x 1)
Cord holders (x 2)
Adjuster (x 1)
Owner’s Manual 115
Keyboard Stand Assembly
1
Attach the adjuster to C.
1-1 Align the tip of the adjuster with the screw
hole, then screw in the adjuster all the way
until it stops turning.
You will adjust the height of the adjuster in
Step 8.
1-2 Untie and straighten out the bundled cord.
Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later
in Step 7.
2
Attach (finger-tighten) D and E to C.
2-1 Align D and E with each end of C.
2-2 Attach D and E to C by finger-tightening the
long screws (6 x 20mm).
3
Attach B.
3-1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and
E, then attach the upper side to D and E.
3-2 Attach the top of B to D and E by finger-tight-
ening the thin screws (4 x 12mm).
3-3 While pushing the lower outside part of D and
E towards each other, secure the bottom of B
at each end using two tapping screws (4 x
20mm).
3-4 Insert the other two tapping screws (4 x
20mm) into the other two screw holes to
secure B.
3-5 While pushing D and E towards each other,
securely tighten the screws that were finger-
tightened in Step 3-2.
4
Secure C.
4-1 Securely tighten the screws on C that were
attached in Step 2-2.
1-1
1-2
C
C
E
D
2-2
B
D
E
3-2
3-5
3-3
3-4
D
B
E
C
4-1
116 Owner’s Manual
Keyboard Stand Assembly
5
Mount A.
5-1 Place your hands at least 15 cm from either
end of A when positioning it.
6
Secure A.
6-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and
right ends of A will project beyond D and E
equally when seen from the front.
6-2 Secure A by tightening the short screws (6 x
16mm) from the front.
7
Connect the pedal cord and the power
cord.
7-1 Insert the pedal cord plug to the pedal connec-
tor from the rear.
7-2 Attach the cord holders to B, then clip the cord
into the holders.
7-3 Use a vinyl tie to bundle the pedal cord.
7-4 For models that feature a voltage selector: Set
the voltage selector to an appropriate voltage.
Voltage Selector
Before connecting the AC power cord, check the
setting of the voltage selector which is provided in
some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V,
220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screw-
driver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct
voltage for your region appears next to the pointer
on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V
when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper
voltage has been selected, connect the AC power
cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A
plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to
match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets
in your area.
7-5 Insert the AC power cord plug into the AC
INLET.
A
E
D
At least 15 cm
A
A
6-1
6-2
Projection of A
An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to
this instrument or result in improper operation.
WARNING
P
E
D
A
L
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-47-5
Owner’s Manual 117
Keyboard Stand Assembly
8
Set the adjuster.
8-1 Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm con-
tact with the floor surface.
9
Attach the headphone hanger.
9-1 Install the headphone hanger using included
two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure.
Remove the protective tapes
Open the key cover and remove the protective tape
on each side of the keyboard.
After completing the assembly, please
check the following.
• Are there any parts left over?
Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors.
• Is this instrument clear of doors and other movable
fixtures?
Move the instrument to an appropriate location.
Does this instrument make a rattling noise when you
shake it?
Tighten all screws.
Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step
on the pedals?
Tu rn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor.
Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into
the sockets?
Check the connection.
If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when
you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly dia-
grams and retighten all screws.
Hold here.
Do not hold here.
When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the
bottom of the main unit.
Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling
can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.
CAUTION
118 Owner’s Manual
+/– .................................................. 15, 67
........................................................ 68
0–9 .................................................. 15, 67
A-B REPEAT ................................. 15, 88
ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 15, 27
CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] ........... 15, 67
DEMO ............................................ 15, 32
Dial ................................................. 15, 67
DSP ON/OFF ................................. 15, 73
DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 15, 18
EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 15, 58
EXECUTE ...................................... 15, 97
EXIT ............................................... 15, 68
FF ................................................... 15, 34
FILE CONTROL ........................... 15, 95
FUNCTION .................................... 15, 92
HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 15, 70
INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 15, 79
LCD CONTRAST ................................ 69
LESSON L, R ................................. 15, 51
LESSON START ........................... 15, 50
LYRICS .......................................... 15, 38
MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 15, 79
MASTER VOLUME ........................... 15
MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 15, 90
MENU ............................................ 15, 95
METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 15, 23
MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 15, 57
P.A.T. ON/OFF ........................ 15, 40, 48
PAUSE ........................................... 15, 34
PC ....................................................... 106
PEDAL ................................................. 15
PHONES .............................................. 15
PIANO RESET .............................. 15, 20
REC, 1–5, A ................................... 15, 60
REGIST. MEMORY ...................... 15, 90
REPEAT & LEARN ...................... 15, 56
REW ............................................... 15, 34
SCORE ........................................... 15, 37
SONG ............................................. 15, 33
SONG MEMORY .......................... 15, 61
SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 15, 19
STANDBY/ON .................................... 15
START/STOP ................................ 15, 67
STYLE ............................... 15, 26–30, 79
SYNC START ......................... 15, 27, 80
SYNC STOP .................................. 15, 81
TEMPO/TAP ...................... 15, 23, 34, 75
USB TO DEVICE ........................ 15, 103
USB TO HOST ............................ 15, 104
VOICE ............................................ 15, 17
A
A-B Repeat ...........................................88
Accessories .............................................7
ACMP ...................................................27
Auto Accompaniment Range ................27
Auto-Accompaniment ..............27, 29, 31
B
Backup ..........................................65, 109
Bell ........................................................25
C
CD-ROM ............................................144
Chord ..................................29–31, 84–85
Chord Dictionary ..................................87
Chord Fingering ..............................31, 86
Chord root .............................................87
Chord type (Chord Dictionary) .............87
Chord type (performance
assistant technology) ...................39–40
Chord/Free type (performance
assistant technology) ...................39, 42
Chord/Melody type (performance
assistant technology) ...................39, 46
Chorus ...................................................72
Chorus Type .......................................139
Computer ............................104–105, 107
D
Default Setting ......................................92
Delete (Song Track) ..............................64
Delete (USB flash memory) ...............101
Delete (User Data) ..............................102
Delete (User Song) ...............................63
Demo ....................................................32
Demo Cancel ........................................94
Display ............................................68–69
Double-Staff Score ...............................37
Drum Kit ...............................................22
Drum Kit List ......................................132
DSP .......................................................73
DSP Type ......................................73, 140
Dual Chorus Level ................................93
Dual Octave ..........................................93
Dual Pan ...............................................93
Dual Reverb Level ................................93
Dual Voice ............................................18
Dual Volume .........................................93
E
Easy Chords ......................................... 31
Easy Song Arranger ............................. 58
Effect Type List ................................. 138
External Clock .............................. 94, 105
External Song ....................................... 36
F
File Control .......................................... 95
File Name ............................................. 98
Flash Memory ...................................... 36
Format (File Control) ........................... 97
Function ................................... 68, 92–94
Function Display .................................. 68
G
Grade .................................................... 53
H
Harmony ............................................... 70
Harmony Type ................................... 138
Harmony Volume ................................. 94
Headphones .......................................... 12
I
Initial Send ......................................... 107
Initialization ......................................... 65
K
Keyboard Out ............................... 94, 105
Keyboard Stand Assembly ................. 114
L
Language .............................................. 16
Lesson .................................................. 50
Load ................................................... 100
Local ............................................. 94, 105
L-Part ........................................... 94, 109
Lyric ..................................................... 38
M
Main Chorus Level ............................... 93
MAIN Display ...................................... 68
Main Octave ......................................... 93
Main Pan .............................................. 93
Main Reverb Level ............................... 93
Main Voice ........................................... 17
Main Volume ....................................... 93
Measure ................................................ 69
Melody ........................................... 37, 49
f
r
Index
Panel controls and terminals Alphabetical order
Index
Owner’s Manual 119
Melody Score ....................................... 37
Melody type (performance
assistant technology) .................. 39, 44
Melody Voice ................................. 59, 89
Messages ............................................ 112
Metronome ........................................... 23
MIDI ................................................... 105
MIDI Data Format .................................. 7
MIDI Implementation Chart ................... 7
Music Database .................................... 57
Music Rest ............................................ 10
Mute ..................................................... 89
N
notation ................................................. 69
O
One Touch Setting ................................ 76
P
P.A.T. Type .................................... 39, 94
PC Mode ............................................. 106
Pedal ..................................................... 21
performance assistant technology ........ 39
Preset Song ............................... 32, 35–36
Q
Quantize ............................................... 94
R
Recording ............................................. 60
Registration Memory ........................... 90
Remote control ................................... 106
Repeat ............................................. 56, 88
Reverb .................................................. 71
Reverb Type ....................................... 138
R-Part ........................................... 94, 109
S
Save (User File) .................................... 98
Save (User Song) .................................. 99
Score ....................................... 37, 49, 120
Single-Staff Score ................................ 37
SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................. 107
Song ...................................................... 33
Song Clear ............................................ 63
Song List .............................................. 35
Song Memory ................................. 60–61
Song Out ....................................... 94, 105
Song Volume ........................................ 88
Sound Type .................................... 77, 93
Specifications ......................................144
Split Chorus Level ................................93
Split Octave ..........................................93
Split Pan ................................................93
Split Point .......................................19, 82
Split Reverb Level ................................93
Split Voice ............................................19
Split Volume .........................................93
Standard Chords ...................................31
Style ..........................................26, 29, 79
Style File .............................................100
Style List .............................................134
Style Out .......................................94, 105
Style Volume ........................................83
Sustain ............................................74, 93
Synchro Start ..................................27, 80
Synchro Stop .........................................81
T
Tempo .............................................34, 75
TimeSignature
(Denominator, Numerator) ...............24
Touch Response ....................................75
Touch Sensitivity ..................................75
Track .....................................................60
Track Clear ...........................................64
Transfer .......................................105, 107
Transpose ..............................................78
Troubleshooting ..................................110
Tuning ...................................................78
U
USB ....................................................103
USB-MIDI driver .................................11
User file ........................................98, 100
User File Save .......................................98
User Song .......................................36, 60
V
Voice .....................................................17
Voice List ...........................................126
X
XF .....................................................6, 38
XGlite .....................................................6
120 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras
This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece.
Hallelujah Chorus
Song No. 9 qq
qq
=123
(Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger)
Scores
Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 121
Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras
122 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-
ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the
part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.
Ave Maria
Song No. 10 qq
qq
=61
(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)
Repeatedly Play the Same Key.
P.A.T.
Your Turn.
Type =CHORD
Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 123
Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras
124 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-
ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the
part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.
Nocturne op.9-2
Song No. 11 qq
qq
=108
(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)
P.A.T.
Type =CHORD/FREE
Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 125
126 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces
Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
The instrument has 64-note maximum polyphony. This means
that it can play a maximum of up to 64 notes at once, regard-
less of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a
number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment
is used the total number of available notes for playing on the
keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the
Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is
exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most
recent notes have priority (last note priority).
Maximale Polyphonie ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Das Instrument verfügt über eine maximale Polyphonie von
64 Noten. Dies bedeutet, daß das Instrument unabhängig von
den aktivierten Funktionen maximal 64 Noten gleichzeitig
spielen kann. Eine bestimmte Anzahl der verfügbaren Noten
wird von der automatischen Begleitung belegt; bei deren Ein-
satz verringert sich somit die Anzahl der für das Spiel auf der
Klaviatur verfügbaren Noten entsprechend. Das Gleiche gilt
für Split Voices und Song-Funktion. Wenn die maximale
Polyphonie überschritten wird, werden die am frühesten
gespielten Noten ausgeschaltet und die zuletzt gespielten
Noten haben Vorrang (Last Note Priority).
Polyphonie maximale ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Le YDP-V240 dispose d’une polyphonie maximale de 64
notes. Cela signifie que l’instrument peut reproduire un nom-
bre maximal de 64 voix à la fois, indépendamment des fonc-
tions utilisées. L’accompagnement automatique fait appel à un
certain nombre de notes disponibles. Il s’ensuit que lorsque
l’accompagnement automatique est utilisé, le nombre total de
notes disponibles pour l’interprétation au clavier est réduit en
conséquence. Cela s’applique aussi aux fonctions Split Voice
(Voix partagées) et Song (Morceau). Lorsque la polyphonie
maximale est dépassée, les notes jouées en premier ne produi-
sent aucun son ; seules les notes interprétées en dernier sont
audibles (priorité à la dernière note).
Polifonía máxima ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
El instrumento tiene una polifonía máxima de 64 notas. Esto
significa que puede tocar un máximo de 64 notas a la vez,
independientemente de las funciones que se usen. El acompa-
ñamiento automático utiliza una parte de las notas disponi-
bles, de forma que cuando éste se utiliza el número de notas
disponibles se reduce proporcionalmente. Lo mismo puede
aplicarse a las funciones Split Voice (Voz de división) y Song
(Canción). Si se excede la polifonía máxima, las notas tocadas
con anterioridad se cortan y se da prioridad a las notas más
recientes (prioridad de la última nota).
The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for
each voice. Use these program change numbers when
playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device.
Program change numbers are often specified as numbers
“0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system,
in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the trans-
mitted program change numbers to select the appropriate
sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program
change number 1.
Some voices may sound continuously or have a long
decay after the notes have been released while the
damper pedal is held.
NOTE
In der Voice-Liste sind für jede Voice MIDI-Programm-
wechselnummern enthalten. Verwenden Sie diese Pro-
grammwechselnummern, wenn Sie das Instrument über
MIDI von einem externen Gerät aus ansteuern.
Die Programmnummern 001 bis 128 hängen direkt mit
den MIDI-Programmwechsel-Nummern 000 bis 127
zusammen. Das bedeutet: Programmnummern und Pro-
grammwechsel-Nummern unterscheiden sich mit einem
Wert von 1. Denken Sie bei diesen Überlegungen daran.
Einige Voices klingen fortwährend, oder klingen sehr
lange aus, nachdem die Tasten losgelassen wurden, wäh-
rend das Dämpferpedal gedrückt ist.
HINWEIS
La liste des voix comporte des numéros de changement
de programme MIDI pour chaque voix. Utilisez ces der-
niers pour commander le YDP-V240 à partir d’un périphé-
rique MIDI.
Les numéros de programme 001 à 128 correspondent aux
numéros de changement de programme MIDI
000 à 127. Cela signifie que les numéros de programme
et les numéros de changement de programme sont déca-
lés de 1. N’oubliez pas de tenir compte de cet écart.
Certaines voix peuvent être entendues en continu ou pré-
senter une longue atténuation une fois que les notes ont
été relâchées et tandis que la pédale de maintien est
enfoncée.
NOTE
La lista de voces incluye números de cambio de programa
MIDI para cada voz. Utilice estos números de cambio de
programa cuando toque el instrumento a través del MIDI
desde un dispositivo externo.
Números de programa de 001 a 128 directamente relacio-
nados con los números de cambio de programa MIDI de
000 a 127. Esto quiere decir que los números de pro-
grama y los números de cambio de programa difieren en
un valor de 1, elemento que se debe tener en cuenta.
Después de soltar las notas, algunas voces podrían sonar
de forma continuada o presentar una larga disminución
mientras se mantiene pisado el pedal amortiguador.
NOTA
Voice List
Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 127
Panel Voice List / Verzeichnis der Bedienfeld-
Voices / Liste des voix de panneau /
Lista de voces del panel
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
001 000 122 001 Natural! Grand
002 000 113 001 Live! Grand Piano
003 000 114 001 Live! Warm Grand Piano
004 000 112 001 Grand Piano
005 000 112 002 Bright Piano
006 000 112 007 Harpsichord
007 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano
008 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano
009 000 113 003 CP 80
E.PIANO
010 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano
011 000 118 005 Cool! Suitcase Electric Piano
012 000 119 005 Cool! Electric Piano
013 000 120 005 Phase Electric Piano
014 000 113 006 Hyper Tines
015 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano
016 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano
017 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano
018 000 113 005 Tremolo Electric Piano
019 000 114 008 E.Clavichord
020 000 112 008 Clavi
021 000 113 008 WahClavi
ORGAN
022 000 118 019 Cool! Organ
023 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ
024 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1
025 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2
026 000 112 019 Rock Organ
027 000 114 019 Purple Organ
028 000 112 018 Click Organ
029 000 116 017 Bright Organ
030 000 127 019 Theater Organ
031 000 121 020 16'+2' Organ
032 000 120 020 16'+4' Organ
033 000 113 020 Chapel Organ
034 000 112 020 Church Organ
035 000 112 021 Reed Organ
ACCORDION
036 000 112 022 Musette Accordion
037 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion
038 000 113 024 Bandoneon
039 000 113 023 Modern Harp
040 000 112 023 Harmonica
GUITAR
041 000 112 025 Classical Guitar
042 000 112 026 Folk Guitar
043 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar
044 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar
045 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar
046 000 112 028 Clean Guitar
047 000 113 027 Octave Guitar
048 000 112 029 Muted Guitar
049 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar
050 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar
BASS
051 000 112 034 Finger Bass
052 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass
053 000 112 035 Pick Bass
054 000 112 036 Fretless Bass
055 000 112 037 Slap Bass
056 000 112 039 Synth Bass
057 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass
058 000 113 040 Dance Bass
STRINGS
059 000 116 050 Live! Orchestra
060 000 112 049 String Ensemble
061 000 112 050 Chamber Strings
062 000 113 050 Slow Strings
063 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings
064 000 112 051 Synth Strings
065 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings
066 000 112 041 Violin
067 000 112 043 Cello
068 000 112 044 Contrabass
069 000 112 047 Harp
070 000 112 106 Banjo
071 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit
CHOIR
072 000 112 053 Choir
073 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble
074 000 112 055 Air Choir
075 000 112 054 Vox Humana
SAXOPHONE
076 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax
077 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax
078 000 114 072 Sweet! Clarinet
079 000 118 067 Growl Sax
080 000 112 067 Tenor Sax
081 000 112 066 Alto Sax
082 000 112 065 Soprano Sax
083 000 112 068 Baritone Sax
084 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax
085 000 112 072 Clarinet
086 000 112 069 Oboe
087 000 112 070 English Horn
088 000 112 071 Bassoon
TRUMPET
089 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet
090 000 117 058 Sweet! Trombone
091 000 114 060 Sweet! Muted Trumpet
092 000 112 057 Trumpet
093 000 112 058 Trombone
094 000 113 058 Trombone Section
095 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet
096 000 112 061 French Horn
097 000 112 059 Tuba
BRASS
098 000 112 062 Brass Section
099 000 113 062 Big Band Brass
100 000 113 063 80’s Brass
101 000 119 062 Mellow Horns
102 000 114 063 Techno Brass
103 000 112 063 Synth Brass
FLUTE
104 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute
105 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute
106 000 112 074 Flute
107 000 112 073 Piccolo
108 000 112 076 Pan Flute
109 000 112 075 Recorder
110 000 112 080 Ocarina
SYNTH LEAD
111 000 112 081 Square Lead
112 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead
113 000 115 082 Analogon
114 000 119 082 Fargo
115 000 112 099 Star Dust
116 000 112 086 Voice Lead
117 000 112 101 Brightness
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces
128 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List / Liste
der XGlite-Voices/optionale XGlite-Voices* / Voix
XGlite/liste des voix* XGlite en option / Lista de
voces de XGlite/voces opcionales de XGlite*
SYNTH PAD
118 000 118 089 SweetHeaven
119 000 112 092 Xenon Pad
120 000 112 095 Equinox
121 000 112 089 Fantasia
122 000 113 090 Dark Moon
123 000 113 101 Bell Pad
PERCUSSION
124 000 112 012 Vibraphone
125 000 112 013 Marimba
126 000 112 014 Xylophone
127 000 112 115 Steel Drums
128 000 112 009 Celesta
129 000 112 011 Music Box
130 000 112 015 Tubular Bells
131 000 112 048 Timpani
DRUM KITS
132 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1
133 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2
134 127 000 009 Room Kit
135 127 000 017 Rock Kit
136 127 000 025 Electronic Kit
137 127 000 026 Analog Kit
138 127 000 113 Dance Kit
139 127 000 033 Jazz Kit
140 127 000 041 Brush Kit
141 127 000 049 Symphony Kit
142 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1
143 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
XG PIANO
144 000 000 001 Grand Piano
145 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP
146 000 040 001 Piano Strings
147 000 041 001 Dream
148 000 000 002 Bright Piano
149 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP
150 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano
151 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP
152 000 032 003 Detuned CP80
153 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano
154 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP
155 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1
156 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP
157 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1
158 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2
*159 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP
160 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2
161 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano
162 000 000 007 Harpsichord
163 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP
164 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2
165 000 000 008 Clavi
166 000 001 008 Clavi KSP
XG CHROMATIC
167 000 000 009 Celesta
168 000 000 010 Glockenspiel
169 000 000 011 Music Box
170 000 064 011 Orgel
171 000 000 012 Vibraphone
172 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP
173 000 000 013 Marimba
174 000 001 013 Marimba KSP
175 000 064 013 Sine Marimba
176 000 097 013 Balimba
177 000 098 013 Log Drums
178 000 000 014 Xylophone
179 000 000 015 Tubular Bells
180 000 096 015 Church Bells
181 000 097 015 Carillon
182 000 000 016 Dulcimer
183 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2
184 000 096 016 Cimbalom
185 000 097 016 Santur
XG ORGAN
186 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ
187 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ
188 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1
189 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2
190 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1
191 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3
192 000 040 017 16+2'2/3
193 000 064 017 Organ Bass
194 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2
195 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ
196 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2
197 000 000 018 Percussive Organ
198 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ
199 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ
200 000 033 018 Light Organ
201 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2
202 000 000 019 Rock Organ
Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 129
203 000 064 019 Rotary Organ
204 000 065 019 Slow Rotary
205 000 066 019 Fast Rotary
206 000 000 020 Church Organ
207 000 032 020 Church Organ 3
208 000 035 020 Church Organ 2
209 000 040 020 Notre Dame
210 000 064 020 Organ Flute
211 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute
212 000 000 021 Reed Organ
213 000 040 021 Puff Organ
214 000 000 022 Accordion
215 000 000 023 Harmonica
216 000 032 023 Harmonica 2
217 000 000 024 Tango Accordion
218 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2
XG GUITAR
219 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar
220 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics
221 000 096 025 Ukulele
222 000 000 026 Steel Guitar
223 000 035 026 12-string Guitar
224 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar
225 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound
226 000 096 026 Mandolin
227 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar
228 000 032 027 Jazz Amp
229 000 000 028 Clean Guitar
230 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar
231 000 000 029 Muted Guitar
232 000 040 029 Funk Guitar
233 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar
234 000 045 029 Jazz Man
235 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar
236 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch
237 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar
238 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar
239 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2
240 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics
241 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback
242 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2
XG BASS
243 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass
244 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm
245 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass
246 000 000 034 Finger Bass
247 000 018 034 Finger Dark
248 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar
249 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass
250 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2
251 000 065 034 Modulated Bass
252 000 000 035 Pick Bass
253 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass
254 000 000 036 Fretless Bass
255 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2
256 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3
257 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4
258 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1
259 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass
260 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2
261 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap
262 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1
263 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass
264 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2
265 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass
266 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass
267 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
*268 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark
269 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass
270 000 041 040 DX Bass
XG STRINGS
271 000 000 041 Violin
272 000 008 041 Slow Violin
273 000 000 042 Viola
274 000 000 043 Cello
275 000 000 044 Contrabass
276 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings
277 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings
278 000 040 045 Suspense Strings
279 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings
280 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp
281 000 040 047 Yang Chin
282 000 000 048 Timpani
XG ENSEMBLE
283 000 000 049 Strings 1
284 000 003 049 Stereo Strings
285 000 008 049 Slow Strings
286 000 035 049 60’s Strings
287 000 040 049 Orchestra
288 000 041 049 Orchestra 2
289 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra
290 000 045 049 Velocity Strings
291 000 000 050 Strings 2
292 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings
293 000 008 050 Legato Strings
294 000 040 050 Warm Strings
295 000 041 050 Kingdom
296 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1
297 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2
298 000 000 053 Choir Aahs
299 000 003 053 Stereo Choir
300 000 032 053 Mellow Choir
301 000 040 053 Choir Strings
302 000 000 054 Voice Oohs
303 000 000 055 Synth Voice
304 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2
305 000 041 055 Choral
306 000 064 055 Analog Voice
307 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit
308 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2
309 000 064 056 Impact
XG BRASS
310 000 000 057 Trumpet
311 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet
312 000 000 058 Trombone
313 000 018 058 Trombone 2
314 000 000 059 Tuba
315 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet
316 000 000 061 French Horn
317 000 006 061 French Horn Solo
318 000 032 061 French Horn 2
319 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra
320 000 000 062 Brass Section
321 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section
322 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1
323 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass
324 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2
325 000 018 064 Soft Brass
326 000 041 064 Choir Brass
XG REED
327 000 000 065 Soprano Sax
328 000 000 066 Alto Sax
329 000 040 066 Sax Section
330 000 000 067 Tenor Sax
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces
130 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
331 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax
332 000 000 068 Baritone Sax
333 000 000 069 Oboe
334 000 000 070 English Horn
335 000 000 071 Bassoon
336 000 000 072 Clarinet
XG PIPE
337 000 000 073 Piccolo
338 000 000 074 Flute
339 000 000 075 Recorder
340 000 000 076 Pan Flute
341 000 000 077 Blown Bottle
342 000 000 078 Shakuhachi
343 000 000 079 Whistle
344 000 000 080 Ocarina
XG SYNTH LEAD
345 000 000 081 Square Lead
346 000 006 081 Square Lead 2
347 000 008 081 LM Square
348 000 018 081 Hollow
349 000 019 081 Shroud
350 000 064 081 Mellow
351 000 065 081 Solo Sine
352 000 066 081 Sine Lead
353 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead
354 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2
355 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth
356 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth
357 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth
358 000 020 082 Big Lead
359 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog
360 000 000 083 Calliope Lead
361 000 065 083 Pure Lead
362 000 000 084 Chiff Lead
363 000 000 085 Charang Lead
364 000 064 085 Distorted Lead
365 000 000 086 Voice Lead
366 000 000 087 Fifths Lead
367 000 035 087 Big Five
368 000 000 088 Bass & Lead
369 000 016 088 Big & Low
370 000 064 088 Fat & Perky
371 000 065 088 Soft Whirl
XG SYNTH PAD
372 000 000 089 New Age Pad
373 000 064 089 Fantasy
374 000 000 090 Warm Pad
375 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad
376 000 000 092 Choir Pad
377 000 066 092 Itopia
378 000 000 093 Bowed Pad
379 000 000 094 Metallic Pad
380 000 000 095 Halo Pad
381 000 000 096 Sweep Pad
XG SYNTH EFFECTS
382 000 000 097 Rain
383 000 065 097 African Wind
384 000 066 097 Carib
385 000 000 098 Sound Track
386 000 027 098 Prologue
387 000 000 099 Crystal
388 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp
389 000 014 099 Popcorn
390 000 018 099 Tiny Bells
391 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel
392 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes
393 000 041 099 Clear Bells
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
394 000 042 099 Chorus Bells
395 000 065 099 Soft Crystal
396 000 070 099 Air Bells
397 000 071 099 Bell Harp
398 000 072 099 Gamelimba
399 000 000 100 Atmosphere
400 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere
401 000 019 100 Hollow Release
402 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano
403 000 064 100 Nylon Harp
404 000 065 100 Harp Vox
405 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad
406 000 000 101 Brightness
407 000 000 102 Goblins
408 000 064 102 Goblins Synth
409 000 065 102 Creeper
410 000 067 102 Ritual
411 000 068 102 To Heaven
412 000 070 102 Night
413 000 071 102 Glisten
414 000 096 102 Bell Choir
415 000 000 103 Echoes
416 000 000 104 Sci-Fi
XG WORLD
417 000 000 105 Sitar
418 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar
419 000 035 105 Sitar 2
420 000 097 105 Tamboura
421 000 000 106 Banjo
422 000 028 106 Muted Banjo
423 000 096 106 Rabab
424 000 097 106 Gopichant
425 000 098 106 Oud
426 000 000 107 Shamisen
427 000 000 108 Koto
428 000 096 108 Taisho-kin
429 000 097 108 Kanoon
430 000 000 109 Kalimba
431 000 000 110 Bagpipe
432 000 000 111 Fiddle
433 000 000 112 Shanai
XG PERCUSSIVE
434 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell
435 000 096 113 Bonang
436 000 097 113 Altair
437 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs
438 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs
439 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal
440 000 000 114 Agogo
441 000 000 115 Steel Drums
442 000 097 115 Glass Percussion
443 000 098 115 Thai Bells
444 000 000 116 Woodblock
445 000 096 116 Castanets
446 000 000 117 Taiko Drum
447 000 096 117 Gran Cassa
448 000 000 118 Melodic Tom
449 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2
450 000 065 118 Real Tom
451 000 066 118 Rock Tom
452 000 000 119 Synth Drum
453 000 064 119 Analog Tom
454 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion
455 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal
XG SOUND EFFECTS
456 000 000 121 Fret Noise
457 000 000 122 Breath Noise
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 131
The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.
Voice-Nummern mit einem Stern (*) sind optionale Xglite-Voices.
Le numéro de voix porteur d’un astérisque (*) est une voix XGlite
en option.
El número de voz con un asterisco (*) es una voz opcional de
XGlite.
458 000 000 123 Seashore
459 000 000 124 Bird Tweet
460 000 000 125 Telephone Ring
461 000 000 126 Helicopter
462 000 000 127 Applause
463 000 000 128 Gunshot
464 064 000 001 Cutting Noise
465 064 000 002 Cutting Noise 2
466 064 000 004 String Slap
467 064 000 017 Flute Key Click
468 064 000 033 Shower
469 064 000 034 Thunder
470 064 000 035 Wind
471 064 000 036 Stream
472 064 000 037 Bubble
473 064 000 038 Feed
474 064 000 049 Dog
475 064 000 050 Horse
476 064 000 051 Bird Tweet 2
477 064 000 056 Maou
478 064 000 065 Phone Call
479 064 000 066 Door Squeak
480 064 000 067 Door Slam
481 064 000 068 Scratch Cut
482 064 000 069 Scratch Split
483 064 000 070 Wind Chime
484 064 000 071 Telephone Ring 2
485 064 000 081 Car Engine Ignition
486 064 000 082 Car Tires Squeal
487 064 000 083 Car Passing
488 064 000 084 Car Crash
489 064 000 085 Siren
490 064 000 086 Train
491 064 000 087 Jet Plane
492 064 000 088 Starship
493 064 000 089 Burst
494 064 000 090 Roller Coaster
495 064 000 091 Submarine
496 064 000 097 Laugh
497 064 000 098 Scream
498 064 000 099 Punch
499 064 000 100 Heartbeat
500 064 000 101 Footsteps
501 064 000 113 Machine Gun
502 064 000 114 Laser Gun
503 064 000 115 Explosion
504 064 000 116 Firework
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
132 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de
Voice No. 132 133 134 135 136 137
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
assign
Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Snare Roll 2
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy
Snare Snappy Electro
Snare Noisy 4
44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2
46 A# 134A# 0Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot H Short
47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Tight Short Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Analog Short
48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Short
Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Rim Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L
Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1
54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed Analog
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2
56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open Analog
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L
Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Analog
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom
Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open
Conga Analog M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L
Conga Analog L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
82 A# 470A# 3Maracas Maracas 2
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L
85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open
Scratch L 2 Scratch L 3
92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
•“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.
Each percussion voice uses one note.
The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard
Note # and Note. For example, in “132: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H”
(Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).
•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.
•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played
simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each
other.)
•„ “ bedeutet, dass der Schlagzeugklang gleich „Standard Kit 1“ ist.
Jede Perkussionsnote belegt eine Note.
Die MIDI-Note # und Note sind in Wirklichkeit eine Octave tiefer als hier
aufgeführt. Beispiel: In „132: Standard Kit 1“ entspricht die „Seq Click H“
(Note# 36/Note C1) der Note (Note# 24/Note C0).
•Key Off: Mit „O“ bezeichnete Tasten hören sofort auf zu klingen, sobald sie
losgelassen werden.
Stimmen mit derselben Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) können nicht
gleichzeitig gespielt werden. (Diese Stimmen sind dazu gedacht, wechsel-
weise gespielt zu werden.)
Drum Kit List
C1
F1
B1
D1
C#1
D#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
F#1
E1
F0
B0
D0
C#0
D#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
F#0
E0
C2
F2
B2
D2
C#2
D#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
F#2
E2
C3
F3
B3
D3
C#3
D#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
F#3
E3
C4
F4
B4
D4
C#4
D#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
F#4
E4
C5
F5
B5
D5
C#5
D#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
F#5
E5
C6
F6
D6
C#6
D#6
G6
F#6
E6
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 133
Voice No. 132 138 139 140 141 142 143
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/001 126/000/002
Keyboard MIDI
Key
Off
Alternate
assign
Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2
Note# Note Note# Note
25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H
30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2
44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Techno Q Kick Soft 2
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate
47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Techno L Gran Cassa
48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Small Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog
Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Door Slam
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
String Slap Scratch Cut
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Scratch H 3
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Analog 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Wind Chime
54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed Analog3
Telephone Ring 2
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Analog 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2
56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Analog 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3
58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open Analog 2
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Analog 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Analog 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog
Hand Cymbal
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Analog 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
Hand Cymbal Short
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
Car Passing
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog Siren
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
Hand Cymbal 2 Train
70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap
Jet Plane
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
Hand Cymbal 2 Short
Starship
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Burst
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
Roller Coaster
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H
Submarine
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
Thunder Scream
82 A# 470A# 3Maracas Maracas 2 Wind Punch
83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H
Stream Heartbeat
84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L
Bubble Footsteps
85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short
Feed
86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 3
92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun
97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun
98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion
99 D# 687D# 5 Firework
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou
per
cussion / Lista de juegos de batería
•« » indique que les sonorités de percussion sont identiques à cel-
les de « Standard Kit 1 ».
Chaque voix de percussion utilise une note unique.
Le numéro de note MIDI (Note #) et la note MIDI se situent en réalité à une
octave inférieure à celle qui est indiquée dans la liste. Par exemple, dans
« 132 : Standard Kit 1 », « Seq Click H » (Note# 36/Note C1) correspond à
(Note# 24/Note C0).
•Key Off : pour les touches signalées par « O », l’émission de sons s’arrête
instantanément aussitôt que les touches sont relâchées.
Les voix portant un même numéro de note alternative (*1 ... 4) ne peuvent
pas être jouées simultanément. (Elles sont en effet conçues pour être
interprétées en alternance).
•“ ” indica que el sonido de batería es el mismo que el
“Standard Kit 1”.
Cada sonido de percusión utiliza una nota.
La nota MIDI # y la nota son en realidad una octava menos de lo que apa-
rece en la lista. Por ejemplo, en “132: Standard Kit 1”, el “Seq Click H”
(Nota# 36/Nota C1) corresponde a (Nota# 24/Nota C0).
•Tecla desactivada: las teclas marcadas con “O” dejan de sonar en el
momento en que se sueltan.
Los sonidos con el mismo número alterno de nota (*1 ... 4) no pueden
tocarse simultáneamente. (Están diseñados para tocarse alternativamente
el uno con el otro.)
C1
F1
B1
D1
C#1
D#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
F#1
E1
F0
B0
D0
C#0
D#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
F#0
E0
C2
F2
B2
D2
C#2
D#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
F#2
E2
C3
F3
B3
D3
C#3
D#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
F#3
E3
C4
F4
B4
D4
C#4
D#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
F#4
E4
C5
F5
B5
D5
C#5
D#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
F#5
E5
C6
F6
D6
C#6
D#6
G6
F#6
E6
134 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
Style List / Style-Liste / Liste des styles / Lista de estilos
Style No. Style Name
8BEAT
1 ChartPianoPop
2 BritPopRock
3 8BeatModern
4 Cool8Beat
5 Classic8Beat
6 60’sGuitarPop
7 8BeatAdria
8 60’s8Beat
9 BubblegumPop
10 BritPopSwing
11 OffBeat
12 60’sRock
13 HardRock
14 RockShuffle
15 8BeatRock
16BEAT
16 16Beat
17 PianoPopShufle
18 PopShuffle1
19 PopShuffle2
20 GuitarPop
21 16BeatUptempo
22 KoolShuffle
23 JazzRock
24 HipHopLight
BALLAD
25 ChartPianoBld
26 PopGtrBallad
27 80’sBallad
28 PianoBallad
29 LoveSong
30 6-8ModernEP
31 6-8SlowRock
32 6-8OrchBallad
33 OrganBallad
34 PopBallad
35 16BeatBallad1
36 16BeatBallad2
DANCE
37 ClubBeat
38 Electronica
39 FunkyHouse
40 MellowHipHop
41 EuroTrance
42 Ibiza
43 DreamDance
44 TechnoPolis
45 Clubdance
46 ClubLatin
47 Garage
48 UKPop
49 HipHopGroove
50 HipShuffle
51 HipHopPop
DISCO
52 70’sDisco1
53 70’sDisco2
54 LatinDisco
55 DiscoPhilly
56 SaturdayNight
57 DiscoChocolate
58 DiscoHands
SWING&JAZZ
59 TradJazzPiano1
60 TradJazzPiano2
61 PianoBarBlues
62 BigBandFast
63 BigBandMedium
64 BigBandBallad
65 BigBandShuffle
66 JazzClub
67 Swing1
68 Swing2
69 OrchestraSwing
70 Five-Four
71 JazzBallad
72 Dixieland
73 Ragtime
74 AfroCuban
75 Charleston
R&B
76 Soul
77 DetroitPop1
78 60’sRock&Roll
79 6-8Soul
80 CrocoTwist
81 Rock&Roll
82 DetroitPop2
83 BoogieWoogie
84 ComboBoogie
85 6-8Blues
COUNTRY
86 70’sCountry
87 Country8Beat
88 CountryPop
89 CountrySwing
90 CountryBallad
91 Country2-4
92 CowboyBoogie
93 CountryShuffle
94 Bluegrass
LATIN
95 BrazilianSamba
96 BossaNova
97 PopBossa
98 Tijuana
99 DiscoLatin
100 Mambo
101 Salsa
102 Beguine
103 GuitarRumba
104 RumbaFlamenco
105 RumbaIsland
106 Reggae
BALLROOM
107 VienneseWaltz
108 EnglishWaltz
109 Slowfox
110 Foxtrot
Style No. Style Name
111 Quickstep
112 Tango
113 Pasodoble
114 Samba
115 ChaChaCha
116 Rumba
117 Jive
TRADITIONAL
118 USMarch
119 6-8March
120 GermanMarch
121 PolkaPop
122 OberPolka
123 Tarantella
124 Showtune
125 ChristmasSwing
126 ChristmasWaltz
127 ScottishReel
128 Hawaiian
WALTZ
129 ItalianWaltz
130 MariachiWaltz
131 GuitarSerenade
132 SwingWaltz
133 JazzWaltz1
134 JazzWaltz2
135 CountryWaltz
136 OberWaltzer
137 Musette
CHILDREN
138 Learning2-4
139 Learning4-4
140 Learning6-8
141 Fun 3-4
142 Fun 4-4
PIANIST
143 Stride
144 PianoBlues1
145 PianoBlues2
146 PianoRag
147 PianoRock&Roll
148 PianoBoogie
149 PianoJazzWaltz
150 PianoJazzBld
151 Arpeggio
152 Musical
153 Habanera
154 SlowRock
155 8BtPianoBallad
156 PianoMarch
157 6-8PianoMarch
158 PianoWaltz
159 PianoBeguine
160 PianoSwing
Style No. Style Name
Style List
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 135
Music Database List / Musikdatenbankliste / Liste des bases de données musicales /
Lista de la base de datos musical
MDB No. MDB Name
ALL TIME HITS
1 Jude Hey
2 New UK
3 MyLoving
4All OK
5 Buttercp
6 JustCall
7 CheepChp
8 Daddy's
9 Dance?
10 GetBack
11 GtrWheel
12 HighTide
13 IWasBorn
14 Sailing
15 BluJeans
16 Holiday
17 Imagine
18 LoveMe
19 LetItBld
20 LdyMdona
21 YelowSub
22 Marriage
23 MovinOut
24 My Shell
25 NowNever
26 DoLoveMe
27 TcktRide
28 SeeClear
29 Masachus
30 Hard Day
31 USA Pie
32 Norway
33 YesterBd
MODERN POP
34 Watches
35 SoundMPH
36 Hold Us
37 Unfound
38 NeedSome
39 PrtTmLvr
40 MoonShdw
41 NikitSng
42 Sure of
43 Off Day
44 Tell Her
45 GirlsMne
46 NeedLove
POP CLASSICS
47 Standing
48 RainLaff
49 Sunshine
50 ForNamdo
51 ThankFor
52 ManPiano
53 CoinLane
54 LovesYou
55 Tmbourin
56 Alone
57 GldField
58 Raindrop
59 SultanSw
60 Life'sWk
61 TopWorld
62 WatchGrl
POP BALLAD
63 WnderLnd
64 CanIStop
65 EvryTime
66 IvoryAnd
67 TheWorld
68 LovWoman
69 Dolannes
70 Madigan
71 Paradise
72 Whisper
BALLAD
73 AllOdds
74 AtonalFl
75 Hero
76 Woman
77 RunToYou
78 LoveOfAl
79 CndleWnd
80 Cavatina
81 Cherish
82 ToLoveMe
83 YouKnow
84 Evrythng
85 EyesOfBl
86 Hello
87 BeThere
88 FlyAway
89 LoveYou
90 NeverLet
91 JustOnce
92 IfYouGo
93 SavingAl
94 InTheDrk
95 LovePwr
96 Vision
97 Beautifl
98 AllAlone
99 Opposite
100 BeHonest
101 SayYou
102 SayNthng
103 Stranger
104 OneDay
105 TheBayou
106 ThisSong
107 Distance
108 ThisWay
109 LoveGone
110 Inspirng
111 TrueColr
ROCK & ROLL
112 ShakenUp
113 Beethovn
114 HurryLov
115 BeCruel
116 Jumping
117 Countdwn
118 SuePeggy
119 Champion
120 Jailhous
121 BlueShoe
122 Rockin24
MDB No. MDB Name
123 Shouting
124 Rock&Rll
125 HonkyTnk
OLDIES
126 Daydream
127 Sumertme
128 Diana's
129 Uptown
130 Apache
131 IGotIt
132 Tonight
133 MyPillow
134 NoRain
135 FinalDance
136 SlpnLion
137 Ghetto
138 LipsLcky
139 PrettyWm
140 TikiGtr
141 TurnThre
142 Sherry
DANCE & DISCO
143 Babylon
144 Goodbye
145 Catch22
146 DISCO
147 Survival
148 TheNavy
149 DontHide
150 Celebrat
151 LondonRU
152 10,2 Sun
153 ShakeYou
154 Believe
155 BoySumer
156 I'mSexy
157 StuffHot
SWING & JAZZ
158 Patrol
159 Charles
160 GiveLove
161 Rhythm
162 LOVE
163 LeroyBad
164 Caraban
165 Misbehav
166 Safari
167 Smiling
168 SoWhatIs
169 TimeGone
170 TasteHny
171 Sandman
172 Tunisian
173 TwoFoot
174 MyBaby
R&B
175 AsPlayed
176 BabyGrov
177 Highwy66
178 SweetCHI
179 JustU&Me
180 ManLoves
181 OurLove
182 Wish I
MDB No. MDB Name
COUNTRY
183 OnTheRd
184 Breathe
185 InMyMind
186 ContryHw
187 GreenGrs
188 EverNeed
189 Lonesome
190 Lucille
191 HomeRng
192 Tennesse
LATIN
193 Bananabt
194 DanceMng
195 DntWorry
196 Jamaica
197 FleaSpa
198 I'mPola
199 MamboJm
200 OneNote
201 PasoCani
202 SayNoMor
203 Beguine
204 Tijuana
205 Picture
ENTERTAINMENT
206 OnTheHil
207 Barnacle
208 Califrag
209 DadClock
210 DanceLd
211 DnceFire
212 BigCntry
213 Cabaret
214 OdeToJoy
215 Mi-Re-Do
216 MyPrince
217 Necesary
218 NoBuiz
219 NoisyOld
220 Sleigh
221 RockBaby
222 Magnifiq
223 Magnfcnt
224 SilentNt
225 Nabucco
226 Standing
227 SummerPl
228 Christms
229 Favorite
230 Tubbie
231 Turkish
232 12OClock
WALTZ & TRADITIONAL
233 Blk&Whte
234 CanCan
235 Charmain
236 Musicbox
237 Clementn
238 Doodah!
239 Dreamer
240 EnterRag
241 Birthday
242 MaryLamb
MDB No. MDB Name
243 Donald's
244 MoonWlz
245 MoulinHt
246 Sunshine
247 PieceOf
248 GreenSlv
249 TakeFour
250 TexRose
251 ThePolka
252 Scarboro
253 Edelweis
254 AroundWd
255 Whatever
256 Yankee's
WORLD
257 Hawaii
258 D'amor
259 ElCondor
260 GoodbyRm
261 ILandOn
262 ItalyBel
263 Cucarumb
264 Puntuali
265 Cielito
266 ItalySun
267 SantaLuc
268 Trumpetr
269 VanMass
PIANIST
270 ItalySun
271 BeGood
272 Chaie's
273 Flower
274 Frenetic
275 Highwy66
276 Leaves
277 Miload
278 Cabaret
279 Wonderfl
280 Submarin
281 Mi-Re-Do
282 MoreRhum
283 NoBuiz
284 BeatifulSn
285 OhBlah
286 Charades
287 Sally's
288 Nabucco
289 Spanish
290 SunnyStr
291 MistyFln
292 LdnBridg
293 GrndClck
294 Importnc
295 Snowman
296 Favorite
297 SugerSpn
298 Washngtn
299 ThisWay
300 ZipperD
MDB No. MDB Name
Music Database List
136 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM / Songs auf der beiliegenden CD-ROM / Morceaux
disponibles sur le CD-ROM fourni / Canciones incluidas en el CD-ROM proporcionado
The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data.
Easy Song Arranger kann nur zusammen mit Songs verwendet werden, die Akkorddaten enthalten.
La fonction Easy Song Arranger ne s’utilise qu’avec des morceaux comportant des données d’accord.
La función Easy Song Arranger (arreglos sencillos de canciones) sólo puede utilizarse con canciones que incluyan datos de acordes.
File Name Song Name Composer
001Nutcr.mid Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” P.I. Tchaikovsky
002Orphe.mid “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture J. Offenbach
003Slavo.mid Slavonic Dances op.72-2 A. Dvorák
004Prima.mid La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) A. Vivaldi
005Medit.mid Méditation (Thaïs) J. Massenet
006Guill.mid Guillaume Tell G. Rossini
007Fruhl.mid Frühlingslied F. Mendelssohn
008Ungar.mid Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 J. Brahms
009Fruhl.mid Frühlingsstimmen J. Strauss II
010Dolly.mid Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening T.Oesten
011Cande.mid La Candeur J.F.Burgmüller
012Arabe.mid Arabesque J.F.Burgmüller
013Pasto.mid Pastorale J.F.Burgmüller
014Petit.mid Petite Réunion J.F.Burgmüller
015Innoc.mid Innocence J.F.Burgmüller
016Progr.mid Progrès J.F.Burgmüller
017Taren.mid Tarentelle J.F.Burgmüller
018Cheva.mid La Chevaleresque J.F.Burgmüller
019Etude.mid Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” F.Chopin
020Marci.mid Marcia alla Turca L.v. Beethoven
021Turki.mid Turkish March W.A. Mozart
022Valse.mid Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” F.Chopin
023Menue.mid Menuett L. Boccherini
024Momen.mid Moments Musicaux op.94-3 F. Schubert
025Enter.mid The Entertainer S. Joplin
026Prelu.mid Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) J.S. Bach
027Violl.mid La Viollette L.Streabbog
028Angel.mid Angels Serenade Traditional
029Saraf.mid Krasnyj Sarafan Traditional
030Ameri.mid America the Beautiful S.A. Ward
031Brown.mid Little Brown Jug Traditional
032Lomon.mid Loch Lomond Traditional
033Bonni.mid My Bonnie Traditional
034Londo.mid Londonderry Air Traditional
035Banjo.mid Ring de Banjo S.C. Foster
036Vogle.mid Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Traditional
037Lorel.mid Die Lorelei F. Silcher
038Funic.mid Funiculi Funicula L. Denza
039Turke.mid Turkey in the Straw Traditional
040Campt.mid Camptown Races S.C. Foster
041Jingl.mid Jingle Bells J.S. Pierpont
042Muss.mid Muss i denn F. Silcher
043Liebe.mid Liebesträume Nr.3 F. Liszt
044Jesu.mid Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring J.S. Bach
045Joy.mid Ode to Joy L.v. Beethoven
046Pearl.mid Pearl Fisher G. Bizet
047Gavot.mid Gavotte F.J. Gossec
048Seren.mid Serenade/Haydn F.J. Haydn
049Menue.mid Menuett BWV. Anh.114 J.S. Bach
050Canon.mid Canon in D J. Pachelbel
051Vogel.mid Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die Zauberflöte” W.A. Mozart
052Piano.mid Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” L.v. Beethoven
053Surpr.mid The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 F.J. Haydn
054WildR.mid To a Wild Rose E.A. MacDowell
055Chans.mid Chanson du Toreador G. Bizet
056Babbi.mid O Mio Babbino Caro G. Puccini
057RowRo.mid Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) Traditional
058Smoky.mid On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) Traditional
059WeWis.mid We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Traditional
060ImMai.mid Im Mai (DUET) Traditional
061Chris.mid O Christmas Tree (DUET) Traditional
062MaryH.mid Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Traditional
063TenLi.mid Ten Little Indians (DUET) S. Winner
064PopGo.mid Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Traditional
065Twink.mid Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Traditional
066Close.mid Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) J.J. Rousseau
067Cucko.mid The Cuckoo (DUET) Traditional
068Augus.mid O du lieber Augustin (DUET) Traditional
069Londo.mid London Bridge (DUET) Traditional
070Three.mid Three Blind Mice (DUET) Traditional
ˇ
Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 137
Harmony Type List / Liste der Harmony-Typen / Liste des types d’har-
monie / Lista de tipos de armonías
No. Harmony Type Description
1 01(Standard Duet)
Harmony types 01–10, 13 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the
single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the
auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing
songs that contain chord data.
Die Harmony-Typen 01 bis 10, 13 sind Tonhöheneffekte und bereichern eine monophon im
rechten Tastaturbereich gespielte Melodie um ein-, zwei- oder dreistimmige Harmonien. Diese
Typen werden nur erzeugt, wenn Akkorde im Tastaturbereich für die Begleitung gespielt wer-
den.
Les types d’effets Harmony 01–10, 13 sont des effets basés sur la hauteur et ajoutent des har-
monies à une, deux ou trois notes à la mélodie à une seule note jouée de la main droite. Ces
effets ne sont audibles que lorsque des accords sont joués dans la section d’accompagnement
automatique du clavier.
Los tipos de armonía 01–10, 13 se basan en el tono y añaden armonías de una, dos o tres
notas a la melodía de una sola nota tocada en la parte de la mano derecha. Estos tipos sólo
suenan cuando se tocan acordes en la sección del acompañamiento automático del teclado.
2 02(Standard Trio)
3 03(Full Chord)
4 04(Rock Duet)
5 05(Country Duet)
6 06(Country Trio)
7 07(Block)
8 08(4-Way Close 1)
9 09(4-Way Close 2)
10 10(4-Way Open)
11 11(1+5)
12 12(Octave)
13 13(Strum)
14 14(Multi Assign)
15 15(Echo 1/4)
Types 15–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with
the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not;
however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 34). The individual
note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings
are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note
triplets.
The Echo effect Types (15–18) create delayed repeats of each note played.
The Tremolo effect Types (19–22) repeat all held notes (up to four).
The Trill effect Types (23–26) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are
held.
Die Harmony-Typen 15 bis 26 sind Rhythmuseffekte und erzeugen im Takt zur Begleitautomatik
Verzierungen oder verzögerte Wiederholungen. Der jeweilige Harmony-Effekt wird sowohl bei
eingeschalteter als auch bei ausgeschalteter automatischer Bass/Akkord-Begleitung erzeugt;
die Effektgeschwindigkeit hängt jedoch stets von der aktuellen Tempoeinstellung ab (Seite 34).
Dank der spezifischen Notenwerte der einzelnen Harmony-Typen können Sie den Effekt präzise
mit dem Rhythmus synchronisieren. Es gibt auch Triolen-Einstellungen: 1/6 = Viertelnotentrio-
len, 1/12 = Achtelnotentriolen, 1/24 = Sechzehntelnotentriolen.
•Die Echo-Effekttypen (15 bis 18) erzeugen verzögerte Wiederholungen jeder gespielten Note.
•Mit den Tremolo-Effekttypen (19 bis 22) werden alle gehaltenen Noten (maximal vier Töne)
wiederholt.
•Die Triller-Effekttypen (23 bis 26) erzeugen Triller (zwei Töne in schnellem Wechsel), wenn
zwei Tasten gehalten werden.
Les types 15–26 sont des effets reposant sur le rythme qui ajoutent des embellissements ou
des répétitions retardées synchronisées avec l’accompagnement automatique. Ces types
d’effets sont audibles que l’accompagnement automatique soit activé ou non. Cependant, la
vitesse réelle de l’effet dépend du réglage du tempo (page 34). La valeur individuelle des notes
pour chaque type vous permet de synchroniser avec précision l’effet sur le rythme. Des régla-
ges de triolet sont également disponibles : 1/6 = triolets de noires, 1/12 = triolets de croches, 1/
24 = triolets de doubles croches.
Les types d’effets Echo (15–18) créent des répétitions retardées de chaque note jouée.
Les types d’effets Tremolo (19–22) répètent toutes les notes maintenues (jusqu’à quatre
notes).
Les types d’effet Trill (23–26) créent des trilles à deux notes (notes alternées) lorsque deux
notes sont maintenues enfoncées.
Los tipos 15 a 26 son efectos basados en el ritmo y añaden embellecimientos o repeticiones
retardadas en sincronización con el acompañamiento automático. Estos tipos suenan tanto si
el acompañamiento automático está activado como si no; sin embargo, la velocidad real del
efecto depende del ajuste de tempo (página 34). Los valores de las notas individuales en cada
tipo le permiten sincronizar el efecto y el ritmo con una gran precisión. También hay disponibles
ajustes de tresillos: 1/6 = tresillos de notas negras, 1/12 = tresillos de corcheas, 1/24 = tresillos
de semicorcheas.
Los tipos de efectos de eco (15 a 18) crean repeticiones retardadas de cada nota tocada.
Los tipos de efectos de trémolo (19 a 22) repiten todas las notas que se mantienen pulsadas
(hasta cuatro).
Los tipos de efectos de trino (23 a 26) crean trinos de dos notas (notas alternadas) cuando se
mantienen pulsadas dos teclas.
16 16(Echo 1/6)
17 17(Echo 1/8)
18 18(Echo 1/12)
19 19(Tremolo 1/8)
20 20(Tremolo 1/12)
21 21(Tremolo 1/16)
22 22(Tremolo 1/32)
23 23(Trill 1/12)
24 24(Trill 1/16)
25 25(Trill 1/24)
26 26(Trill 1/32)
Harmony Type List
138 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types
Reverb Types / Reverb-Typen / Types d’effets Reverb / Tipos de reverberación
No. Type Description MSB LSB
1 HALL1
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.
10
2 HALL2 116
3 HALL3 117
4 HALL4 118
5 HALL5 11
6 HALL M 16
7 HALL L 17
8 BASIC HALL 130
9 LARGE HALL 131
10 ATMO HALL 123
11 ROOM1
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room.
216
12 ROOM2 217
13 ROOM3 218
14 ROOM4 219
15 ROOM5 20
16 ROOM6 21
17 ROOM7 22
18 ROOM S 25
19 ROOM M 26
20 ROOM L 27
21 ACOSTIC ROOM 220
22 DRUMS ROOM 221
23 PERC ROOM 222
24 STAGE1
Reverb suitable for a solo instrument.
316
25 STAGE2 317
26 STAGE3 30
27 STAGE4 31
28 PLATE1
Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit.
416
29 PLATE2 417
30 PLATE3 40
31 GM PLATE 47
32 TUNNEL Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. 17 0
33 CANYON A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. 18 0
34 BASEMENT A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. 19 0
35 WHITE ROOM A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. 16 0
36 NO EFFECT No effect. 00
Effect Type List
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 139
Chorus Types / Chorus-Typen / Types d’effets Chorus / Tipos de coro
No. Type Description MSB LSB
1 CHORUS1
Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.
66 17
2 CHORUS2 66 8
3 CHORUS3 66 16
4 CHORUS4 66 1
5 CHORUS5 65 2
6 CHORUS6 65 0
7 CHORUS7 65 1
8 CHORUS8 65 8
9 CHORUS FAST 65 16
10 CHORUS LITE 65 17
11 GM CHORUS1 65 3
12 GM CHORUS2 65 4
13 GM CHORUS3 65 5
14 GM CHORUS4 65 6
15 FB CHORUS 65 7
16 CELESTE1
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
66 0
17 CELESTE2 66 2
18 SYMPHONIC1
Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste.
68 16
19 SYMPHONIC2 68 0
20 FLANGER1
Adds a sweeping effect to the sound.
67 8
21 FLANGER2 67 16
22 FLANGER3 67 17
23 FLANGER4 67 1
24 FLANGER5 67 0
25 GM FLANGER 67 7
26 ROTARY SP1
Simulates a rotary speaker.
69 16
27 ROTARY SP2 71 17
28 ROTARY SP3 71 18
29 ROTARY SP4 70 17
30 ROTARY SP5 66 18
31 ROTARY SP6 69 0
32 ROTARY SP7 71 22
33 2WAY ROT SP 86 0
34 AUTO PAN1
Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back).
71 16
35 AUTO PAN2 71 0
36 EP AUTOPAN 71 21
37 T_AUTO PAN1 Tempo synchronized Auto PAN. 121 0
38 TREMOLO1
Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.
70 16
39 TREMOLO2 71 19
40 TREMOLO3 70 0
41 EP TREMOLO 70 18
42 GT TREMOLO1 71 20
43 GT TREMOLO2 70 19
44 T_TREMOLO 120 0
45 NO EFFECT No effect. 00
d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos
140 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
DSP Types / DSP Typen / Types de DSP / Tipos de DSP
No. Type Description MSB LSB
1 HALL1
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.
10
2 HALL2 116
3 HALL3 117
4 HALL4 118
5 HALL5 11
6 HALL M 16
7 HALL L 17
8 BASIC HALL 130
9 LARGE HALL 131
10 ATMO HALL 123
11 ROOM1
Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room.
216
12 ROOM2 217
13 ROOM3 218
14 ROOM4 219
15 ROOM5 20
16 ROOM6 21
17 ROOM7 22
18 ROOM S 25
19 ROOM M 26
20 ROOM L 27
21 ACOSTIC ROOM 220
22 DRUMS ROOM 221
23 PERC ROOM 222
24 STAGE1
Reverb suitable for a solo instrument.
316
25 STAGE2 317
26 STAGE3 30
27 STAGE4 31
28 PLATE1
Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit.
416
29 PLATE2 417
30 PLATE3 40
31 GM PLATE 47
32 TUNNEL Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. 17 0
33 CANYON A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. 18 0
34 BASEMENT A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. 19 0
35 WHITE ROOM A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. 16 0
36 CHORUS1
Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.
66 17
37 CHORUS2 66 8
38 CHORUS3 66 16
39 CHORUS4 66 1
40 CHORUS5 65 2
41 CHORUS6 65 0
42 CHORUS7 65 1
43 CHORUS8 65 8
44 CHORUS FAST 65 16
45 CHORUS LITE 65 17
46 GM CHORUS1 65 3
47 GM CHORUS2 65 4
48 GM CHORUS3 65 5
49 GM CHORUS4 65 6
50 FB CHORUS 65 7
51 CELESTE1
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
66 0
52 CELESTE2 66 2
53 SYMPHONIC1
Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste.
68 16
54 SYMPHONIC2 68 0
55 ENS DETUNE1
Chorus effect without modulation, created by adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound.
87 0
56 ENS DETUNE2 87 16
57 KARAOKE1
Echo for karaoke.
20 0
58 KARAOKE2 20 1
59 KARAOKE3 20 2
60 ER1
This effect isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb.
90
61 ER2 91
62 GATE REVERB Simulation of gated reverb. 10 0
63 REVERS GATE Simulation of gated reverb played back in reverse. 11 0
64 EQ DISCO
Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in most disco
music.
76 16
65 EQ TEL
Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound heard
through a telephone receiver.
76 17
66 2BAND EQ Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies. 77 0
Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 141
67 3BAND EQ
Mono EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range frequen-
cies.
76 0
68 ST 3BAND EQ
Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range fre-
quencies.
76 18
69 HM ENHANCE1
Adds new harmonics to the input signal to make the sound stand out.
81 16
70 HM ENHANCE2 81 0
71 FLANGER1
Adds a sweeping effect to the sound.
67 8
72 FLANGER2 67 16
73 FLANGER3 67 17
74 FLANGER4 67 1
75 FLANGER5 67 0
76 GM FLANGER 67 7
77 V_FLANGER Flanger which simulates vintage tube and fuzz sounds. 104 0
78 TEMPO FLANGER Tempo synchronized flanger. 107 0
79 DELAY LCR1
Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and C (center).
516
80 DELAY LCR2 50
81 DELAY LR Produces two delayed sounds: L and R. Two feedback delays are provided. 6 0
82 ECHO Two delayed sounds (L and R), and independent feedback delays for L and R. 7 0
83 CROSS DELAY The feedback of the two delayed sounds is crossed. 8 0
84 TEMPO DELAY Tempo synchronized delay. 21 0
85 TEMPO ECHO Tempo synchronized delay. 21 8
86 TEMPO CROSS Tempo synchronized L&R delay. 22 0
87 V_DST ROCA
Vintage Distortion.
103 18
88 V_DST FUSION 103 19
89 V_DST CRUNC 98 28
90 V_DST VINTAG 98 29
91 V_DST HARD2 98 30
92 V_DST HEAVY 98 31
93 V_DST HARD1 98 0
94 V_DST SOFT 98 2
95 DIST HARD1
Hard-edge distortion.
75 16
96 DIST HARD2 75 22
97 DIST SOFT1
Soft, warm distortion.
75 17
98 DIST SOFT2 75 23
99 DIST HEAVY Heavy distortion. 73 0
100 OVERDRIVE1
Adds mild distortion to the sound.
74 0
101 OVERDRIVE2 74 9
102 ST DIST Stereo distortion. 73 8
103 ST OD Stereo Overdrive. 74 8
104 ST DIST HARD Hard-edge stereo distortion. 75 18
105 ST DIST SOFT Soft, warm soft distortion. 75 19
106 AMP SIM1
A simulation of a guitar amp.
75 0
107 AMP SIM2 75 1
108 ST AMP1
Stereo amp simulator.
75 20
109 ST AMP2 75 21
110 ST AMP3 75 8
111 ST AMP4 75 24
112 ST AMP5 75 25
113 ST AMP6 75 26
114 DST+DELAY1
Distortion and Delay are connected in series.
95 16
115 DST+DELAY2 95 0
116 OD+DELAY1
Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.
95 17
117 OD+DELAY2 95 1
118 CMP+DST+DLY1
Compressor, Distortion and Delay are connected in series.
96 16
119 CMP+DST+DLY2 96 0
120 CMP+OD+DLY1
Compressor, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.
96 17
121 CMP+OD+DLY2 96 1
122 V_DST H+DLY
V Distortion and Delay are connected in series.
98 1
123 V_DST S+DLY 98 3
124 DST+TDLY Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 100 0
125 OD+TDLY Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 100 1
126 COMP+DIST1
Compressor and Distotion are connected in series.
73 16
127 COMP+DIST2 73 1
128 CMP+DST+TDLY Compressor, Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 101 0
129 CMP+OD+TDLY1
Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.
101 1
130 CMP+OD+TDLY2 101 16
131 CMP+OD+TDLY3 101 17
132 CMP+OD+TDLY4 101 18
133 CMP+OD+TDLY5 101 19
134 CMP+OD+TDLY6 101 20
No. Type Description MSB LSB
Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos
142
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
135 V_DST H+TDL1
V Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series.
103 0
136 V_DST H+TDL2 103 17
137 V_DST S+TDL1 103 1
138 V_DST S+TDL2 103 16
139 COMP MED
Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded. A sense of attack
can also be added to the sound.
83 16
140 COMP HEAVY 83 17
141 COMP MELODY 105 16
142 COMP BASS 105 17
143 MBAND COMP This effect independently compresses the level of certain frequency bands in the sound. 105 0
144 COMPRESSOR
Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded. A sense of attack
can also be added to the sound.
83 0
145 NOISE GATE Gates the audio signal when the audio signal falls below a specified level. 84 0
146 VCE CANCEL Attenuates the audio in the center position. 85 0
147 AMBIENCE Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound to add spatial width. 88 0
148 TALKING MOD Adds a vowel sound to the input signal. 93 0
149 ISOLATOR Attenuates the level of audio signals only at mid-range frequencies. 115 0
150 PHASER1
Cyclically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound.
72 0
151 PHASER2 72 8
152 PHASER3 72 19
153 T_PHASER1 108 0
154 T_PHASER2 108 16
155 EP PHASER1 72 17
156 EP PHASER2 72 18
157 EP PHASER3 72 16
158 PITCH CHG1
Changes the pitch of the input signal.
80 16
159 PITCH CHG2 80 0
160 PITCH CHG3 80 1
161 DUAL ROT BRT
Rotary speaker simulation with speed switching.
99 16
162 D ROT BRT F 99 30
163 DUAL ROT WRM 99 17
164 D ROT WRM F 99 31
165 DUAL ROT SP1 99 0
166 DUAL ROT SP2 99 1
167 ROTARY SP1
Simulates a rotary speaker.
69 16
168 ROTARY SP2 71 17
169 ROT SP2 FAST 71 23
170 ROTARY SP3 71 18
171 ROT SP3 FAST 71 24
172 ROTARY SP4 70 17
173 ROT SP4 FAST 70 20
174 ROTARY SP5 66 18
175 ROT SP5 FAST 66 19
176 ROTARY SP6 69 0
177 ROTARY SP7 71 22
178 ROT SP7 FAST 71 25
179 ROTARY SP8 69 17
180 ROT SP8 FAST 69 18
181 ROTARY SP9 69 19
182 ROT SP9 FAST 69 20
183 2WAY ROT SP 86 0
184 DST+ROT SP Distortion and rotary speaker connected in series. 69 1
185 DST+2ROT SP Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. 86 1
186 OD+ROT SP Overdrive and rotary speaker connected in series. 69 2
187 OD+2ROT SP Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. 86 2
188 AMP+ROT SP Amp simulator and rotary speaker connected in series. 69 3
189 AMP+2ROT SP Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. 86 3
190 AUTO PAN1
Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back).
71 16
191 AUTO PAN2 71 0
192 AUTO PAN3 71 1
193 EP AUTOPAN 71 21
194 T_AUTO PAN1
Tempo synchronized pan.
121 0
195 T_AUTO PAN2 121 1
196 TREMOLO1
Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.
70 16
197 TREMOLO2 71 19
198 TREMOLO3 70 0
199 EP TREMOLO 70 18
200 GT TREMOLO1 71 20
201 GT TREMOLO2 70 19
202 VIBE VIBRATE Vibraphone effect. 119 0
203 T_TREMOLO Tempo synchronized tremolo. 120 0
No. Type Description MSB LSB
Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 143
Effect types cannot be adjusted, except for the following:
Reverb level, Chorus level, DSP level on page 93
(For example, delay time cannot be changed in DELAY LCR1).
The actual effect may not be audible depending on the particular Voice.
204 AUTO WAH1
Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter.
78 16
205 AUTO WAH2 78 0
206 AT WAH+DST1
The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Distortion.
78 17
207 AT WAH+DST2 78 1
208 AT WAH+OD1
The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Overdrive.
78 18
209 AT WAH+OD2 78 2
210 TEMPO AT WAH Tempo synchronized auto wah. 79 0
211 TOUCH WAH1
Changes the center frequency of a wah filter according to the input level.
82 0
212 TOUCH WAH2 82 8
213 TOUCH WAH3 82 20
214 TC WAH+DST1
The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Distortion.
82 16
215 TC WAH+DST2 82 1
216 TC WAH+OD1
The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Overdrive.
82 17
217 TC WAH+OD2 82 2
218 WH+DST+DLY1
Wah, Distortion and Delay are connected in series.
97 16
219 WH+DST+DLY2 97 0
220 WH+DST+TDLY WAH, Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 102 0
221 WH+OD+DLY1
Wah, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.
97 17
222 WH+OD+DLY2 97 1
223 WH+OD+TDLY1
WAH, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.
102 1
224 WH+OD+TDLY2 102 16
225 CLVI TC WAH1
Clavinet Touch Wah.
82 18
226 CLVI TC WAH2 82 28
227 EP TC WAH1
EP Touch Wah.
82 19
228 EP TC WAH2 82 29
229 PEDAL WAH Pedal position changes the center frequency of the wah filter. 122 0
230 PEDAL WH+DST
Distortion applied to the pedal wah output.
122 1
231 P.WH+DIST HD 122 21
232 P.WH+DIST HV 122 23
233 P.WH+DIST LT 122 25
234 PEDAL WH+OD
Overdrive (distortion) applied to the pedal wah output.
122 2
235 P.WH+OD HD 122 22
236 P.WH+OD HV 122 24
237 P.WH+OD LT 122 26
238 NO EFFECT No effect. 00
239 THRU Bypass without applying an effect. 64 0
No. Type Description MSB LSB
Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos
144 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
Specifications / Technische Daten /
Spécifications techniques / Especificaciones
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify prod-
ucts or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check
with your Yamaha dealer.
*Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor,
Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die technischen Daten, das
Gerät selbst oder Sonderzubehör nicht in jedem Land gleich sind, setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung.
* Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de
changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les
équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche.
* Las especificaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito de servir como información. Yamaha Corp. se reserva
el derecho a efectuar cambios o modificaciones en los productos o especificaciones en cualquier momento sin previo aviso. Puesto que las espe-
cificaciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos los mercados, solicite información a su distribuidor Yamaha.
Dimensions
[W x D x H] 1,369mm x 502mm x 852mm (53-7/8" x 19-3/4" x 33-9/16")
With music rest [W x D x H] 1,369mm x 502mm x 1,006mm (53-7/8" x 19-3/4" x 39-5/8")
Weight 49kg (108 lbs.)
Keyboard
Type GHS (Graded Hammer Standard) keyboard with matte black keytops
Number of keys 88
Touch Sensitivity Soft/Medium/Hard/Off
Pedal Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft
Display
Size and Type 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit)
Score, Lyrics Yes
Contrast Yes
Cabinet
Key Cover Style Sliding
Music rest Yes
Voices
Tone Generation Technology AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling
Number of Dynamic Steps 3
Number of Polyphony (Max.) 64
Number of Voices 131panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices
Effects
Reverb 35 types
Chorus 44 types
Harmony 26 types
DSP 238 types
Dual Yes
Split Yes
Styles
Number of Styles 160 Preset styles + External files
Fingering Multi fingering/Full keyboard
One Touch Setting Yes
Songs
Number of Songs 30 Preset songs + 5 User songs + 70 External songs (CD-ROM)
Recording 5 User Songs
Easy Song Arranger Yes
Lesson Yes
Music Data Base Number of MDB 300 Preset MDB + External files
Storage USB device Yes
Tempo
Range 5–280
Metronome Yes
Registration Memory 8 Banks x 2
Other Functions
Piano Reset Yes
Performance Assistant Technology Yes
Transpose, Tuning Yes
Connectivity
Headphones 2
USB TO HOST Yes
USB TO DEVICE Yes
Amplifiers/Speakers
Amplifiers 20W + 20W
Speakers 12cm x 2
Accessories Included Accessories
Accessories CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide, My Yamaha Product
User Registration, Bench (included or optional depending on locale),
Owner’s Manual
Optional Accessories
Headphones HPE-150
Floppy Disk Drive UD-FD01
Specifications
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 145
146 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 147
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment
This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that
used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household
waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to
applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the
Directives 2002/96/EC.
By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and
prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which
could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact
your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you
purchased the items.
[For business users in the European Union]
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer
or supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items,
please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of
disposal.
Verbraucherinformation zur Sammlung und Entsorgung alter Elektrogeräte
Befindet sich dieses Symbol auf den Produkten, der Verpackung und/oder
beiliegenden Unterlagen, so sollten benutzte elektrische Geräte nicht mit dem
normalen Haushaltsabfall entsorgt werden.
In Übereinstimmung mit Ihren nationalen Bestimmungen und den Richtlinien 2002/96/
EC, bringen Sie alte Geräte bitte zur fachgerechten Entsorgung, Wiederaufbereitung
und Wiederverwendung zu den entsprechenden Sammelstellen.
Durch die fachgerechte Entsorgung der Elektrogeräte helfen Sie, wertvolle
Ressourcen zu schützen und verhindern mögliche negative Auswirkungen auf die
menschliche Gesundheit und die Umwelt, die andernfalls durch unsachgerechte
Müllentsorgung auftreten könnten.
Für weitere Informationen zum Sammeln und Wiederaufbereiten alter Elektrogeräte,
kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre örtliche Stadt- oder Gemeindeverwaltung, Ihren
Abfallentsorgungsdienst oder die Verkaufsstelle der Artikel.
[Information für geschäftliche Anwender in der Europäischen Union]
Wenn Sie Elektrogeräte ausrangieren möchten, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihren Händler
oder Zulieferer für weitere Informationen.
[Entsorgungsinformation für Länder außerhalb der Europäischen Union]
Dieses Symbol gilt nur innerhalb der Europäischen Union. Wenn Sie solche Artikel
ausrangieren möchten, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre örtlichen Behörden oder Ihren
Händler und fragen Sie nach der sachgerechten Entsorgungsmethode.
148 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones
Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des déchets d’équipements
électriques et électroniques.
Le symbole sur les produits, l’emballage et/ou les documents joints signifie que les
produits électriques ou électroniques usagés ne doivent pas être mélangés avec les
déchets domestiques habituels.
Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets
d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez les déposer aux points de
collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la réglementation nationale et aux
Directives 2002/96/EC.
En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et
électroniques, vous contribuerez à la sauvegarde de précieuses ressources et à la
prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé humaine qui pourraient advenir
lors d’un traitement inapproprié des déchets.
Pour plus d’informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets
d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter votre municipalité,
votre service de traitement des déchets ou le point de vente où vous avez acheté les
produits.
[Pour les professionnels dans l’Union Européenne]
Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et
électroniques veuillez contacter votre vendeur ou fournisseur pour plus d’informations.
[Information sur le traitement dans d’autres pays en dehors de l’Union
Européenne]
Ce symbole est seulement valables dans l’Union Européenne. Si vous souhaitez vous
débarrasser de déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez
contacter les autorités locales ou votre fournisseur et demander la méthode de
traitement appropriée.
Información para Usuarios sobre Recolección y Disposición de Equipamiento Viejo
Este símbolo en los productos, embalaje, y/o documentación que se acompañe
significa que los productos electrónicos y eléctricos usados no deben ser mezclados
con desechos hogareños corrientes.
Para el tratamiento, recuperación y reciclado apropiado de los productos viejos, por
favor llévelos a puntos de recolección aplicables, de acuerdo a su legislación nacional
y las directivas 2002/96/EC.
Al disponer de estos productos correctamente, ayudará a ahorrar recursos valiosos y
a prevenir cualquier potencial efecto negativo sobre la salud humana y el medio
ambiente, el cual podría surgir de un inapropiado manejo de los desechos.
Para mayor información sobre recolección y reciclado de productos viejos, por favor
contacte a su municipio local, su servicio de gestión de residuos o el punto de venta
en el cual usted adquirió los artículos.
[Para usuarios de negocios en la Unión Europea]
Si usted desea deshacerse de equipamiento eléctrico y electrónico, por favor contacte
a su vendedor o proveedor para mayor información.
[Información sobre la Disposición en otros países fuera de la Unión Europea]
Este símbolo sólo es válidos en la Unión Europea. Si desea deshacerse de estos
artículos, por favor contacte a sus autoridades locales y pregunte por el método
correcto de disposición.
Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 149
The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit.
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1 Read these instructions.
2Keep these instructions.
3 Heed all warnings.
4 Follow all instructions.
5 Do not use this apparatus near water.
6 Clean only with dry cloth.
7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table specified
by the manufacturer, or sold with
the apparatus. When a cart is
used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination
to avoid injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during
lightning storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug
is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have
fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally,
or has been dropped.
(UL60065_03)
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte
Madero Este-C1107CEK
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 011-4119-7000
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND
Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-500-2925
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia)
Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,
121059, Russia
Tel: 495 626 5005
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.
5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex
Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India
Tel: 0124-466-5551
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 021-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 03-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 6747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
4, 6, 15 and 16
th
floor, Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2622
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
HEAD OFFICE
Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
EKB54
U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division
© 2009 - 2011 Yamaha Corporation
WR86780 103POCR*.*-**B0
Printed in Indonesia
Yamaha Global Home
http://www.yamaha.com
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual Bedienungsanleitung Mode d’emploi Manual de instrucciones For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual. IMPORTANT — Check your power supply — Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. Weitere Informationen über die Montage des Keyboard-Ständers erhalten Sie in den Anweisungen am Ende dieses Handbuchs. WICHTIG — Überprüfen Sie Ihren Netzanschluss — Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Spannung in Ihrem örtlichen Stromnetz mit der Spannung übereinstimmt, die auf dem Typenschild auf der Unterseite des Instruments angegeben ist. In bestimmten Regionen ist auf der Unterseite des Keyboards in der Nähe des Netzkabels ein Spannungswähler angebracht. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Spannungswähler auf die Spannung Ihres lokalen Stromnetzes eingestellt ist. Dieser Spannungswähler ist bei Auslieferung auf 240 V eingestellt. Sie können die Einstellung mit einem Schlitzschraubenzieher ändern. Drehen Sie dazu den Wählschalter, bis der Pfeil auf dem Instrument auf die richtige Spannung zeigt. Pour obtenir des informations sur l'assemblage du support du clavier, reportez-vous aux instructions à la fin de ce manuel. IMPORTANT — Contrôler la source d'alimentation — Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur le panneau inférieur correspond à la tension du secteur. Dans certaines régions, l'instrument peut être équipé d'un sélecteur de tension situé sur le panneau inférieur du clavier à proximité du cordon d'alimentation. Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est bien réglé en fonction de la tension secteur de votre région. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d'usine. Pour modifier ce réglage, utilisez un tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre l'indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau. Para información sobre el montaje del soporte del teclado, consulte las instrucciones al final de este manual. IMPORTANTE — Verifique la alimentación de corriente — Asegúrese de que tensión de alimentación de CA de su area corresponde con la tension especificada en la placa de características del panel inferior. En algunas zonas puede haberse incorporado un selector de tensión en el panel inferior de la unidad del teclado principal, cerca del cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de que el selector de tensión esté ajustado a la tensión de su área. El selector de tension se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para cambiar el ajuste, emplee un destornillador de cabeza ”recta” para girar el selector de modo que aparezca la tensión correcta al lado del indicador del panel. EN DE FR ES Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. Model Serial No. 92-469- ➀ 2 Owner’s Manual Purchase Date FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. (class B) Die Seriennummer dieses Produkts befindet sich an der Unterseite des Geräts. Sie sollten die Nummer des Modells, die Seriennummer und das Kaufdatum an den unten vorgesehenen Stellen eintragen und diese Anleitung als Dokument Ihres Kaufs aufbewahren. Modellnr. Seriennr. Vous pouvez trouver le numéro de série de ce produit sur le bas de l'unité. Notez ce numéro de série dans l'espace fourni ci-dessous et conservez ce manuel en tant que preuve permanente de votre achat afin de faciliter l'identification du produit en cas de vol. (2 wires) N˚ de modèle N˚ de série COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Piano Model Name : YDP-V240 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. El número de serie de este producto se encuentra en la parte inferior de la unidad. Debe tomar nota del número de serie en el espacio proporcionado a continuación y conservar este manual como registro permanente de su adquisición; todo ello facilitará la identificación en caso de robo. Modelo nº Serie nº (bottom) (FCC DoC) Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Assembly • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. (1)B-13 4 Owner’s Manual 1/2 Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. • During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any water off immediately with a soft cloth. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Using the bench (If included) • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. Saving data Saving and backing up your data Handling caution • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the Registration Memory (page 90.) Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device/or other external device such as a computer (pages 98, 99, 109). • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Backing up the USB storage device/external media • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ● Trademarks • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (1)B-13 2/2 Owner’s Manual 5 Copyright Notice The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for three (3) of the songs pre-installed in this electronic keyboard: Mona Lisa from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A. Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans Copyright © 1949 (Renewed 1976) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Composition Title : Against All Odds Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403 Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited. Can’t Help Falling In Love from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII Words and Music by George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore Copyright © 1961 ; Renewed 1989 Gladys Music (ASCAP) Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). 6 Owner’s Manual Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Digital Piano! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. About this Owner’s Manual and Data List The documentation and reference materials for this instrument consist of the following: Owner’s Manual (this book) ■ Introduction (page 2): Please read this section first. ■ Reference (page 70): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instrument’s various functions. ■ Appendix (page 110): This section introduces reference material. Data List You can download various MIDI-related reference materials, such as the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart, from the Yamaha Manual Library. Connect to the Internet, visit the following website, type the model name of your instrument (such as “YDP-V240”) in the Model Name text box, then click the Search button. Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Accessories The package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • Accessory CD-ROM • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide • Owner’s manual (this book) • Bench * A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale. • My Yamaha Product User Registration * The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features GHS (Graded Hammer Standard) keyboard with matte black keytops Graded Hammer Standard keyboard with matte black keytops on the instrument, feature graded key weight and response throughout the keyboard range. They respond to a heavier touch in the low range of the keyboard and a lighter touch in the higher range of the keyboard, thus providing natural grandpiano type playability. The matte finish of the black keys enhances keyboard’s luxurious appearance. The Graded Hammer keyboard also offers superb playability for tremolo and other repetitive-striking techniques. ■ Performance assistant technology Page 39 Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in time with the music. And if you can’t play with both hands, you can still play the melody simply by tapping one key. ■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices All you need is one finger! Page 17 The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. ■ Play Along with Styles Page 27 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance … and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. ■ Easy Performance with Music Notation Display When you play back a song, the corresponding score will be shown on the display as the song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If the song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear on the score display. * No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the song you are using with the score display function does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data. 8 Owner’s Manual Page 37 Contents Introduction Backup and Initialization Copyright Notice ....................................................................... 6 Logos........................................................................................ 6 About this Owner’s Manual and Data List ................................ 7 Accessories .............................................................................. 7 Special Features ...................................................................... 8 Setting Up 10 Key Cover............................................................................... 10 Music Rest.............................................................................. 10 Connecting to a Computer (USB TO HOST terminal) ............ 11 Turning the Power On ............................................................ 11 Using Headphones ................................................................. 12 Maintenance ........................................................................... 13 Panel Controls and Terminals 14 Front Panel ............................................................................. 15 Pedals, Jacks and Terminals ................................................. 15 Quick Guide Changing the Display Language 16 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 17 Select and Play a Voice—MAIN ............................................. 17 Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL .............................. 18 Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT 19 Play the Grand Piano Voice ................................................... 20 Using the Pedals .................................................................... 21 Fun Sounds 22 Drum Kits................................................................................ 22 Sound Effects ......................................................................... 22 The Metronome 23 Start the Metronome............................................................... 23 Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ........................................... 23 Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat............................................. 24 Setting the Click bell sound .................................................... 25 Adjusting the Metronome Volume .......................................... 25 Playing Styles 26 Select a Style Rhythm ............................................................ 26 Play Along with a Style ........................................................... 27 Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords .................................... 31 Using Songs 32 Play the Demo song ............................................................... 32 Select and Listen to a Song ................................................... 33 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ...................... 34 Change the Song Tempo ....................................................... 34 Song List ................................................................................ 35 Types of Songs ...................................................................... 36 Displaying the Song Score ..................................................... 37 Display the Lyrics ................................................................... 38 The Easy Way to Play Piano 39 CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands.................................... 40 CHORD/FREE Type— Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only................ 42 MELODY Type—Play with One Finger .................................. 44 CHORD/MELODY— Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right ..... 46 Select a Song For a Lesson 50 Lesson 1—Waiting ................................................................. 51 Lesson 2—Your Tempo ......................................................... 54 Lesson 3—Minus One ............................................................ 55 Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn .......................... 56 Play Using the Music Database Change a Song’s Style 57 58 Try Out the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 58 Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................... 58 Record Your Own Performance 60 Recording Procedure ............................................................. 61 Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ......................................... 63 Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song .. 64 65 Backup.................................................................................... 65 Initialization ............................................................................. 65 Basic Operation 66 Basic Operation ...................................................................... 66 The Displays ........................................................................... 68 MAIN Display Items ................................................................ 69 Reference Play with a Variety of Effects 70 Adding Harmony ..................................................................... 70 Adding Reverb ........................................................................ 71 Adding Chorus ........................................................................ 72 Adding DSP ............................................................................ 73 Adding Sustain ....................................................................... 74 Handy Performance Features 75 Tap Start ................................................................................. 75 Touch Response Sensitivity ................................................... 75 One Touch Setting.................................................................. 76 Select a Sound Type .............................................................. 77 Pitch Controls ......................................................................... 78 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 79 Pattern Variation (Sections).................................................... 79 Setting the Split Point ............................................................. 82 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................... 83 Adjusting the Style Volume..................................................... 83 Chord Basics .......................................................................... 84 Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard .............................. 86 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ..................... 87 Song Settings 88 Song Volume .......................................................................... 88 A-B Repeat ............................................................................. 88 Muting Independent Song Parts ............................................. 89 Change the Melody Voice ...................................................... 89 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 90 Saving to the Registration Memory ........................................ 90 Recalling a Registration Memory............................................ 91 The Functions 92 Selecting and Setting Functions ............................................. 92 Saving and Loading Data 95 Connecting a USB Flash Memory .......................................... 95 Formatting USB Flash Memory .............................................. 97 Saving Registration Memory data to USB Flash Memory ...... 98 Save a User Song to USB Flash Memory .............................. 99 Loading Files from a USB Flash Memory ............................. 100 Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory ............................ 101 Delete User Data from the Instrument .................................. 102 Playing Files Located on a USB Flash Memory ................... 102 Connections 103 Connectors ........................................................................... 103 Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................ 104 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer ..... 105 Remote Control of MIDI Devices .......................................... 106 Initial Send ............................................................................ 107 Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument ... 107 Appendix Troubleshooting .................................................................... 110 Messages ............................................................................. 112 Keyboard Stand Assembly............................... 114 Index ..................................................................................... 118 Scores .................................................................................. 120 Voice List .............................................................................. 126 Drum Kit List ......................................................................... 132 Style List ............................................................................... 134 Music Database List ............................................................. 135 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM.......................... 136 Harmony Type List ............................................................... 137 Effect Type List ..................................................................... 138 Specifications ....................................................................... 144 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up Key Cover ■ To open the key cover: CAUTION Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. • Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the cover and main unit. ■ To close the key cover: Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. CAUTION • Do not place objects, such as a piece of metal or paper, on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. CAUTION • Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. Music Rest ■ To raise the music rest: 1 2 3 Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of the music rest. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports. ■ To lower the music rest: 1 2 3 Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest). Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down. CAUTION • Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest until it is all the way down. 10 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Connecting to a Computer (USB TO HOST terminal) Computer Connect the instrument’s USB TO HOST terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance data and song files between the two (page 104). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the following: USB TO HOST terminal USB TO HOST • First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable to connect the instrument to the computer. After making the connections, turn the instrument’s power on. • Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer. USB cable Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”. Turning the Power On Power switch Power indicator 1 2 3 Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left. Check the power cord to make sure it is connected properly. (See page 116.) Press the power switch to turn on the power. Press the power switch again to turn the power OFF. NOTE Power indicator • If you forget to turn off the power to the instrument and close the key cover, the power indicator will remain lit, indicating that the power is still on. Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. CAUTION • Even when the switch is in the “off” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power cord from the wall AC outlet. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up Using Headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. You can connect two sets of standard stereo headphones. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either jack.) PHONES Bottom surface Standard stereo phone plug Using the Headphone Hanger A headphone hanger is included in the package so that you can hang the headphoneson this instrument. Install the headphone hanger using the included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure. CAUTION • Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Otherwise, this instrument or the hanger may be damaged. 12 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Maintenance To keep your instrument in optimum condition, we recommend that you periodically follow the maintenance points below. ■ Instrument and Bench Maintenance ■ Tuning When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Unlike an acoustic piano, the instrument does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. CAUTION • Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemicalimpregnated wiping cloths. Tighten the screws of the instrument and bench periodically. ■ Pedal Cleaning As with an acoustic piano, pedals may become tarnished across the ages. When this occurs, polish the pedal with a compound designed for piano pedals. Before using the compound, make sure to read the instructions for proper usage. ■ Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the instrument along with other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition it was in when you first took it out of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. When transporting the assembled instrument, make sure all screws are properly tightened and have not been loosened by moving the instrument. CAUTION • Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemicalimpregnated wiping cloths. Otherwise, the pedal may become discolored or degraded. Owner’s Manual 13 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel w e t r o y u i !2 !1 !0 !3 #9 !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 PHONES q #6 #8 PEDAL #7 USB $0 TO HOST 14 Owner’s Manual q Voice Category List (page 126) Style Category List (page 134) Song Category List (page 35) Music Database List (page 135) !9 Panel Controls and Terminals ¸ Display (pages 68, 69) @0 @1 @8 @2 @3 @4 @5 @9 #0 #1 #2 @6 #3 #4 @7 #5 Front Panel i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 !7 [FUNCTION] button .........................pages 68, 92 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .............page 23 [TEMPO/TAP] button.......................pages 34, 75 LESSON [L], [R], [START] buttons.........page 51 SONG MEMORY [REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons ......................page 61 [REPEAT & LEARN]/ [ACMP ON/OFF] button ..................pages 56, 27 [A-B REPEAT]/ [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button............pages 88, 79 [REW]/[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ...pages 34, 79 [FF]/[SYNC STOP] button ...............pages 34, 81 [PAUSE]/[SYNC START] button......pages 34, 80 !8 [START/STOP] button ...............pages 26, 33, 67 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 [CONTRAST] knob ................................. page 69 [EXIT] button........................................... page 68 [SONG] button ........................................ page 33 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button ....... page 58 [STYLE] button ....................................... page 26 [VOICE] button........................................ page 17 Dial....................................................pages 67, 92 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons .............................................pages 67, 92 @8 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons............................pages 67, 92 r Power switch ( ) ...................................page 11 [MASTER VOLUME] control ...........pages 11, 66 [DEMO] button.........................................page 32 FILE CONTROL [MENU], [EXECUTE] buttons.......................pages 95–101 t [LYRICS] button.......................................page 38 y [SCORE] button.......................................page 37 u [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button............................page 40 f q w e r @9 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button .......................... page 19 [DUAL ON/OFF] button .......................... page 18 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ................. page 70 [DSP ON/OFF] button............................. page 73 [PIANO RESET] button .......................... page 20 REGIST MEMORY [MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons......... page 90 #5 Drum Kit .................................................. page 22 The illustrations above each key indicate the drum and percussion instruments assigned to the keys when “Standard Kit 1” is selected. !9 [MUSIC DATABASE] button....................page 57 Pedals, Jacks and Terminals #6 Pedals.......................................................page 21 #7 [PEDAL] jack..........................................page 116 #8 [PHONES] jacks.......................................page 12 #9 USB TO DEVICE terminal....................... page 96 $0 USB TO HOST terminal ........................ page 104 Owner’s Manual 15 Changing the Display Language Quick Guide This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display language. The default display language is English, but if you switch to Japanese the lyrics, file names, demo display, and some messages will be displayed in Japanese where appropriate. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons a number of times until the “Language” item appears. r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 The currently selected display language will appear below the “Language” item. When highlighted you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the language as required. Language item The currently selected language 3 Select a display language. The [+] button selects English and the [-] button selects Japanese. The language selection will be stored in the internal flash memory so that it is retained even when the power is turned off. 4 16 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice—MAIN This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The main voice selection display will appear. The currently selected voice number and name will be highlighted. The currently selected voice number and name 2 Select the voice you want to play. While watching the highlighted voice name rotate the dial. The available voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected here becomes the main voice. For this example select the “106 Flute” voice. Select 106 Flute 3 Play the keyboard. Adjusts volume. Try selecting and playing a variety of voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Owner’s Manual 17 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as the “dual” voice. 1 Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button. The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off. When turned on the dual voice “DUAL” will appear in the MAIN display. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. Voice Number 2 Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The dual voice selection display will appear. Dual voice selection display The currently selected dual voice Hold for longer than a second 3 18 Select the desired dual voice. Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice. For this example try selecting the “124 Vibraphone” voice. Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 4 Play the keyboard. Two voices will sound at the same time. Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 82). Split point (default value is 054) 021 (A-1) 024 (C0) 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) Split voice 1 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) 108 (C7) Main voice and dual voice Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button. The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When turned on the split voice “SPLIT” will appear in the MAIN display. The currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split point. Voice Number 2 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The split voice selection display will appear. Split voice selection display The currently selected split voice Hold for longer than a second Owner’s Manual 19 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Select the desired split voice. 4 Play the keyboard. Watch the highlighted split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example try selecting the “042 Folk Guitar” voice. Try selecting and playing a range of split voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Play the Grand Piano Voice When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PIANO RESET] button. The “001 Natural! Grand Piano” voice will be selected. NOTE • When you press the [PIANO RESET] button all settings other than touch sensitivity are turned off. The dual and split voices will also be turned off, so only the Grand Piano voice will play over the entire keyboard. 20 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Using the Pedals The instrument has three foot pedals that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. NOTE • The pedal functions do not affect Split voice. NOTE Damper (Right) Pedal The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. The damper pedal also features a naturally expressive half-pedal function. • If the damper pedal doesn’t work, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the jack (page 116). NOTE Half-pedal: • While playing the piano with Sustain and you want to slightly mute the sustained sound, release the damper pedal from maximum position to half position. When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. Sostenuto (Center) Pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.” NOTE • Organ, string and choir voices will continue to sound for as long as the sostenuto pedal is depressed. When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note, the note will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Soft (Left) Pedal The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. Owner’s Manual 21 Fun Sounds This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties. Drum Kits Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other normal instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at different pitches. If you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound of a different drum or percussion instrument. ◆ Drum Kit Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “132 Standard Kit 1”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll hear a triangle, maracas, bongos, drums ... a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. For details on the instruments included in the drum kit voices (voice numbers 132 to 143), see the “Drum Kit List” on page 132. Sound Effects The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 142 and 143). When either of these voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard. ◆ Sound Effect Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “143 SFX Kit 2”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects! As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door, and many other useful effects. “142 SFX Kit 1” includes lightning, running water, dogs barking, and others. Some keys do not have assigned sound effects, and will therefore produce no sound. For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the “Drum Kit List” on page 133. 22 Owner’s Manual The Metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. Start the Metronome Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. 4/4 Current setting Adjusting the Metronome Tempo 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo setting. Tempo 2 Use the dial to select a tempo from 5 to 280. Owner’s Manual 23 The Metronome Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. 1 Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to select the function “Time Signature–Numerator”. Hold for longer than a second Numerator (Number of beats per measure.) Denominator (The length of one beat.) The available range is from 1 through 60. Select 5 for this example. A bell accent will be sounded at the first beat of each measure. 3 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the beat length function “Time Signature–Denominator”. 4 Use the dial to select the beat length. 24 r NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. f 2 Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. Owner’s Manual The Metronome Setting the Click bell sound This allows you to select whether the click sound has a bell accent, or plays only a click sound. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Bell item. 3 You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons to turn the bell sound on or off. r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 Adjusting the Metronome Volume 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Metronome Volume item. r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 Metronome volume 3 Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required. Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Styles This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 160 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures (see page 134 for a complete list of the available styles). In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features. Select a Style Rhythm Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The style select display will appear. The currently selected style number and name will be highlighted. NOTE • When you play the style, set the Sound Type to “Style.” Doing this a more natural, enhanced sound over the internal speakers (see page 77). However, when using the headphones, normal sound is applied. The currently selected style 2 Select a style. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. 26 Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the available styles is provided on page 134. The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. Owner’s Manual NOTE • Style files transferred from a computer or stored on a USB flash memory device connected to the instrument can be selected and used in the same way as the internal Styles (Style numbers 161–). File transfer instructions are provided on page 107. NOTE • Style numbers 131, 143–160 have no rhythm part and therefore no rhythm will play if you use them for the above example. For these styles first turn auto accompaniment on as described on page 27, press the [START/STOP] button, and the accompaniment bass and chord parts will begin playing when you play a key to the left of the keyboard split point. Playing Styles Play Along with a Style You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style. Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. NOTE ● When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (054: F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. • The keyboard split point can be changed as required: refer to page 82. Split point (054: F#2) Auto accompaniment region 3 Turn sync start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on. Flashes when sync start is on. Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Styles When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function off. 4 Play a left-hand chord to start the style. You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords. This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you play. Try this! Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 29. These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progressions sound good with the styles. Split point Auto accompaniment region 5 Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody with your right hand. Split point Auto accompaniment region 6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re done. You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 79. 28 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment. In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall feel of the music you play. On page 27 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take your accompaniments to a new level. On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively creating a complete song. ■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Play the scores with the left hand. Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 27. * The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to produce the chord progressions. Split point Play to the left of the split point. Recommended Style 041 Euro Trance —Dance music with simple chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. F C G Am This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending. Owner’s Manual 29 Playing Styles Recommended Style 148 Piano Boogie —3-chord boogie-woogie— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. C F C G F C Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords! Recommended Style 096 Bossa Nova —Bossa nova with jazz-style chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Dm Bm7 5 G7 CM7 FM7 E7 Am A7 This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. 30 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords: ● Easy Chords ● Standard Chords The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. The function is called Multi Fingering. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 27). The keyboard to the left of the split point (default: 054/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area of the keyboard. Split point (default: 054/F#2) Db Eb F# G# Bb Db Eb F# C D E F GA B C D E F Accompaniment range Root notes and the corresponding keys ■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. ■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. ● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords] C (9) C C C M7 C M7 (9) C6 C6 C sus4 Cm Cm (b5) ) C ( C M7aug C m6 C m7 C mM7 C mM7 ( ) C aug ) ( (9) (11) C m7 (9) (b5) C m7 C mM7 C7 C7 ) (9) C7 ) ) C7 (13) ( ( ) C 7aug (b13) (b9) (#9) C7 ) C 7sus4 (b5) C7 C7 ) ( (#11) C7 C dim7 C dim ( (b5) ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) C m7 ) • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). (9) ( C m7 ) C M7 • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. C M7 ( ( (b5) C7 (#11) (9) ) • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. ( Cm ( ( ) ) • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. C sus2 * Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. Owner’s Manual 31 Using Songs With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to a demo song and 29 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The songs are organized by category. In this section we’ll learn how to play a demo song and select other songs, and briefly describe the demo song and 29 songs provided. Song Listen Lesson Play the Demo song 1 Press the [DEMO] button The demo song will start playing. To stop demo play back at any time, press the [DEMO] button or [START/STOP] button. or 32 Owner’s Manual Record Using Songs Select and Listen to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button The song selection display will appear. The currently selected song number and name will be highlighted. The currently selected song number and name 2 NOTE Select a song. Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 35. Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to. • You can also play songs you have recorded yourself (User Songs) or songs that have been transferred to the instrument from a computer in the same way that you play the internal songs. The song highlighted here can be played 3 001–030 Built in Songs (See page 35) 031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself). 036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 107–109) or Songs in a USB flash memory connected to the instrument (page 95) Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button again. Song start! Owner’s Manual 33 Using Songs Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF], rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song. REW Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the song. FF Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the song. PAUSE Press the pause button to pause playback. Change the Song Tempo You can change the song tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from 5 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute. You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 34 Owner’s Manual Using Songs Song List These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s Easy Song Arranger feature, songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Suggested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used. Category No. 1 Main Demo Voice Demo Function Demo Piano Solo Piano Ensemble Piano Accompaniment CHORD Name This song showcases the beautiful piano sound. The songs in this category have been created to give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with the various features. 2 CHORD Winter Serenade 3 CHORD Take off 4 CHORD Live! Grand Demo 5 CHORD Live! Orchestra Demo 6 CHORD Cool! RotorOrgan Demo 7 CHORD Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo 8 CHORD ModernHarp & Sweet Soprano Demo 9 CHORD Hallelujah Chorus 10 CHORD Ave Maria 11 CHORD Nocturne op.9-2 12 For Elise 13 Maple Leaf Rag 14 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair 15 CHORD Amazing Grace 16 CHORD Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans) 17 Suggested Uses Mozart Piano Sonata No.13, K333 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. 18 CHORD Scarborough Fair 19 CHORD Old Folks at Home 20 CHORD Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403) 21 CHORD Ep Ballad 22 CHORD Boogie Woogie 23 CHORD Rock Piano 24 CHORD Salsa 25 CHORD Country Piano 26 CHORD Gospel R&B 27 CHORD Medium Swing 28 CHORD Jazz Waltz 29 CHORD Medium Bossa 30 CHORD SlowRock (Can’t Help Falling In Love: George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore) These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices. They make maximum use of the characteristics of each voice, and might serve as inspiration for your own compositions. Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature. The lesson function cannot be used with songs 10 and 11. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs. A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use as lesson songs. When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band. These songs allow you to practice backing parts one hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to master this important skill. : Includes chord data. The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 16, 20 and 30 which is copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual. Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. Owner’s Manual 35 Using Songs Types of Songs The following three types of songs can be used by this instrument. ● Demo Song and Preset songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument) ........................................ Song numbers 001–030. ● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035. ● External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–. * The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 108 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. The chart below shows the basic processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song files from storage to playback. Computer Your own performance USB flash memory Song Song Record Transfer (page 60) (page 107) Connect (page 103) Song Storage locations Preset Songs (001–030) The 30 songs built into the instrument. User Songs (031–035) External Songs (loaded Song) (036–) Song Song Save Play NOTE • User songs cannot produce score display as they are. If you convert a user song file to SMF and save it to USB flash memory, however, it becomes capable of producing score display and can be used with the lesson features. NOTE • Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the flash memory area for the external song, and vice versa. 36 Owner’s Manual USB (036–) Song Load Using Songs Displaying the Song Score This instrument is capable of display the scores of songs. Scores are displayed for the 30 internal preset songs as well as songs in SMF format stored in a USB fl ash memory or the instrument’s internal flash memory. 1 2 Select a song. Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 33. Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will appear. There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff. These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed. NOTE • The score is created from the recorded song data, and it may not be exactly the same as original score. • Both chords and lyrics will be shown in single-staff score display of a song that includes chord and lyric data. • When there are many lyrics they may be displayed in two rows a measure. • Some lyrics or chords may be abbreviated if the selected song has a lot of lyrics. Single-staff Marker Melody score • Small notes that are hard to read may be easier to read after you use the quantize function (page 94). Chord Lyrics NOTE Double-staff 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. 4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. • No chords or lyrics are shown on the double-staff. The song will begin playing. The triangular will move across the top of the score to indicate the current location. Owner’s Manual 37 Using Songs Display the Lyrics If a song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display. No lyrics will be displayed for a song that contains no lyric data even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed. 1 Select a song. 2 Press the [LYRICS] button. Select a song between 16, 20, and 30 by performing steps 1 and 2 described on page 33. The title, lyricist, and composer of the song will appear on the display. NOTE • Songs downloaded from the Internet or commercially available song files, including XF format files (page 6), are compatible with the lyrics display features as long as they are standard MIDI file format files containing lyric data. Lyrics display may not be possible with some files. NOTE • If the lyrics display shows garbled characters, try changing the display language (page 16). Song title, lyricist, and composer. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. The song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the display. The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the song. Lyrics and chord display ■ Preset Songs That Can be Used For Lyrics Display Number 38 Name 016 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans) 020 Against All Odds (Collins 0007403) 030 Can’t Help Falling In Love (George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore) Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! You could even just tap one key and the results would be a beautiful melody. So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun. Performance assistant technology offers four selectable types. Select the type that produces the best results for you. ● Chord ...................... No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-balanced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play anything with both your left and right hands. ● Chord/Free........... If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with lefthand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to support the melody you are playing with your right hand. Split point Play your own melody with the right hand. ● Melody ................... This type lets you play the melody of the selected song by playing any keys with just one finger. Start playing melodies right away, even if you’ve never played a keyboard instrument before! ● Chord/Melody .... Play the melody of the selected song with one finger on the right-hand section of the keyboard, and play chords on the left-hand section of the keyboard using the Chord type. Split point Refer to page 48 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play. Owner’s Manual 39 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the CHORD type. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “010 Ave Maria”. When the Chord type is selected, features only available for this song can be seen in the display! NOTE • Using Songs (page 32) The song displayed here will be played. ● What is a Song? You know the normal meaning of this word, but in this instrument the term “Song” refers to the data that makes up a complete song. The performance assistant technology features uses the chord and melody data, and should always be used with a song (page 32). 40 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will play repeatedly. Listen to the basic pattern for four measures while getting a feel for the basic pattern, then begin playing yourself from the fifth measure. The keys you should play will be shown in the display. 5 Play on the keyboard. Before After Try playing the score on the left with both hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. You’ll notice that at measure five the notes will come out according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assistant technology Chord type will continue to “correct” the notes that you play. This is the performance assistant technology Chord type. NOTE • The score for Ave Maria is provided on page 122. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Owner’s Manual 41 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the CHORD/FREE type. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord/Free Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Free type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “011 Nocturne”. NOTE • Using Songs (page 32) The song displayed here will be played. 42 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The left-hand keys you should play will be shown on the display. 5 Play on the keyboard. Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split point with your left hand. Split point With this type notes played on the left-hand side of the split point will actually sound an octave higher. Play the Nocturne melody with your right hand. Continually play an FA-C arpeggio with your left hand as indicated by the score shown in the display. Although you’re repeatedly playing the same notes with your left hand, the actual notes produced will change to match the music. This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Free type. NOTE • The score for Nocturne is provided on page 124. Press the [SCORE] button if you want to see the score for the right-hand part in the display. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Owner’s Manual 43 The Easy Way to Play Piano MELODY Type—Play with One Finger See page 48 for some hints on how to play melodies. 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the MELODY type. Select Melody Hold for longer than a second Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Melody type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. NOTE • Using Songs (page 32) The song displayed here will be played. 44 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not sound. You can enjoy playing the melody yourself (step 5). Song start! 5 Play on the keyboard. To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then tap a key with one finger of your right hand in time with the music. You can play any key. If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display. Sounds like a melody! How does it sound? You’ve played the melody using only one finger thanks to the performance assistant technology Melody type! You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Owner’s Manual 45 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD/MELODY—Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the CHORD/MELODY type. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord/Melody Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Melody type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. NOTE • Using Songs (page 32) The song displayed here will be played. 46 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to eight measures while memorizing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the ninth measure. 5 Play on the keyboard. Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split point with your left hand. Split point With this type notes played on the left-hand side of the split point will actually sound an octave higher. Play along with the rhythm of the song melody with your right hand. You can play any keys as long as you’re playing to the right of the split point. At the same time play accompaniment-like chords and phrases with your left hand. No matter what you play, you’ll produce the song melody with your right hand and beautiful chords and phrases with your left hand. This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Melody type. If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Owner’s Manual 47 The Easy Way to Play Piano Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro! Here are a few hints for using the Chord type. If you select Chord/Free or Chord/Melody, the left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the Chord type section, so use these hints on the lefthand section of the keyboard. To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do). The chord information included in the song is displayed in the lower area of the MAIN display. You will get even better results if you match your left-hand rhythm to rhythm of the chord indicator in the display. Sounds like you’re playing the right notes! How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to the performance assistant technology Chord type! Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 1. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 2. Play 1 note at a time with your right hand (for example: index finger → middle finger → ring finger). Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other combination. 48 Owner’s Manual ● Play alternately with the left and right hands—type 3. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. The Easy Way to Play Piano Make Use of the Score in the Melody Type. If you want to play the melody with the correct rhythm, use the onscreen score feature. Displaying the Score. After performing steps 1 to 4 on page 44, press the [SCORE] button. The melody score will appear. Appears when the performance assistant technology is on Marker Chord Melody The marker will indicate the current position in the score during playback. If you play a key each time the marker appears above a note in the score you will be able to play the melody with the correct “original” rhythm. Play while watching the marker ● Songs That Can Be Used With the performance assistant technology. When the Chord type is selected the performance assistant technology can only be used with songs that include chord data. When the Melody type is selected the performance assistant technology will only work with songs that include melody data. In order to find out if a song includes the required data, first select the song and then press the [SCORE] button. If chords appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Chord type or any combination type that includes the Chord type. If melody appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Melody type or any combination type that includes the Melody type. ● External Songs and the performance assistant technology. Songs downloaded from the Internet can also be used with the performance assistant technology as long as they include the required chord and/or melody data. See page 108 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. Owner’s Manual 49 Select a Song For a Lesson Yamaha Education Suite You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0/1) transferred to the instrument from a computer. (page 107) During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to start learning! Lesson Flow: Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! Select the song you want to learn. Select the part you want to work on (right hand, left hand, both hands). Select lesson 1, 2, or 3. Lesson start! The practice methods: ● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes. ● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. ● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song. NOTE • Song numbers 10 and 11 are function demos for performance assistant. The lesson function cannot be used with them. 50 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 1—Waiting In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play the right note. 1 Select a song for your lesson. 2 Press [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want to use for your lesson. As listed on page 35 there are a variety of song types. Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a bothhands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Select R for right-hand lesson. Select L for left-hand lesson. Select LR for bothhands lesson. Owner’s Manual 51 Select a Song For a Lesson 4 Start Lesson 1. Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... An explanation of the selected lesson will appear on the display for a few seconds before the lesson begins. In this case the “R1” indicates that righthand lesson 1 has been selected. (Lesson 1) (Lesson 2) (Lesson 3) (Song Lesson off) Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1. Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The next note to be played is indicated by a dot (●) on the appropriate key of the graphic on-screen keyboard. When you play the correct note the marker will move to the next key to be played. Playback will pause and wait for you to play the correct note. The triangular marker (▼) above the score indicates playback progress. ▼ Marker Left-hand part ● Marker 52 Owner’s Manual Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) Select a Song For a Lesson ● Shifting the keyboard left or right. The hidden ( ) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by pressing the [+] or [-] button. The displayed range (61 keys) Actual keyboard range is 88 keys 61 keys of the keyboard’s range are shown on the display. This instrument actually have 88 keys. In some songs that include very high or low notes, those notes may fall outside the displayed range and may not be shown on the display. In such cases an “over” indicator appear to the left or right of the graphic keyboard. Use the [+] or [-] button to shift the keyboard left or right so you can see the notes (the ● marker will appear on the appropriate key in the display). Notes that actually fall outside the keyboard’s range cannot be used in the lesson. 5 Stop the Lesson mode You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2. ■See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. NOTE • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION Grade item (page 94). Owner’s Manual 53 Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 2—Your Tempo Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on page 51). 2 Start Lesson 2. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... In this case the “R2” indicates that right-hand lesson 2 has been selected. Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected. The triangular marker will appear in the score display, and will move to indicate the current note in the song. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo. Play while following the score marker Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3. 54 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on page 51). 2 Start Lesson 3. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... In this case the “R3” indicates that right-hand lesson 3 has been selected. Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected. Play along while listening to the song. The score marker and keyboard marker in the display will indicate the notes to play. ▼ Marker Left-hand part ● Marker 3 Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Owner’s Manual 55 Select a Song For a Lesson Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during a lesson. The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you pressed the [REPEAT & LEARN] button, and then jump back four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do is press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback q w Song playback direction Oops! A mistake! 56 Owner’s Manual Press immediately NOTE • You can change the number of measures the Repeat and learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. A Music Database list will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 135 of the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “158 Patrol”. NOTE • Music Database (MDB) files transferred from a computer or stored on a USB flash memory device connected to the instrument can be selected and used in the same way as the internal Music Databases (MDB numbers 301–). File transfer instructions are provided on page 107. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 27). Refer to pages 29–31 for information about playing chords. Split Point If you press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display at this point you can check the assigned voice and style. 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. Owner’s Manual 57 Change a Song’s Style In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played. You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete change of image. Try Out the Easy Song Arranger You can try out the Easy Song Arranger feature using the internal Hallelujah Chorus song. Press the [SONG] button and use the dial to select “009 Hallelujah Chorus.” Press the [START/STOP] button begin playback of the song. An explanation of the Easy Song Arranger feature will appear on the display. As the song progresses the styles will change, changing the overall image of the song. Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as well—any songs that include chord data. NOTE • The score for Hallelujah Chorus is provided on page 120. Using the Easy Song Arranger 1 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The Song Select display will appear. The currently selected song name and number will be highlighted. The currently selected song number and name are displayed here. 2 58 Select a Song. Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange. Owner’s Manual Change a Song’s Style 3 Listen to the song. NOTE Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the next step while the song is playing. • When playing song numbers 010, 011, and 020 to 030 while using the Easy Song Arranger, melody tracks will be automatically muted and no melody will sound. In order to hear the melody tracks you will need to press the SONG MEMORY buttons [3] to [5]. Song start! 4 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The Style Select display will appear. The currently selected style name and number will be highlighted. The currently selected style number and name are displayed here. 5 Select a style. 6 Select a voice part. Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only the styles change. NOTE • Because the Easy Song Arranger uses song data you can’t specify chords by playing in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/ OFF] button will not function. • If the time signature of the song and style are different, the time signature of the song will be used. If you press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second a voice list will appear. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected melody voice will be displayed. Hold for longer than a second 7 Select a voice you want to play as a song melody. Use the dial to change the melody voice. As you select different melody voices the song will remain the same while only the melody voice changes. NOTE • If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button during style playback, the style will stop but the song will continue playing. Use the [START/STOP] button to stop playback completely. Owner’s Manual 59 Record Your Own Performance You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031 through 035. Once your performances have been saved as user songs they can be played in the same way as the internal songs. User songs can also be saved to a USB flash memory device, as described on page 99. ■ Recordable Data 5 melody tracks and 1 Style (chord) track can be recorded. To record your own performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the track(s) you want to record on. • User songs are saved as SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0 files. Refer to page 107 for information on SMF files. ● SONG MEMORY (Track) [1]–[5] Record the melody parts. ● SONG MEMORY (Track) [A] Records the style pattern and chord parts. Melody Chords Specify track(s) and record Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track A ■ Track Mute This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 89). 60 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Up to approximately 30,000 notes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the melody tracks. Record Your Own Performance Recording Procedure 1 From the MAIN display press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to record to. Rotate the dial to select a song number between 031 and 035. 2 Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selection on the display. ◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button. The selected tracks will be highlighted in the display. CAUTION • If you record to track that contains previously-recorded data the previous data will be overwritten and lost. NOTE • Style accompaniment is automatically turned on when you select the style track [A] for recording. • Style accompaniment cannot turned on or off while recording is in progress. Press and hold ◆ Record a Melody track Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Select button [1]–[3] if you want to record a dual voice. Split voices cannot be recorded. The selected track will be highlighted in the display. NOTE • If style accompaniment is on and track [A] has not yet been recorded, the style track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when a melody track is selected. If you only want to record a melody track, be sure to turn the style track [A] off. To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while recording is in progress. Owner’s Manual 61 Record Your Own Performance 3 Recording will start when you play on the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. Current measure NOTE • If the memory becomes full during recording a warning message will appear and recording will stop automatically. Use the song clear or track clear (page 63) function to delete unwanted data and make more room available for recording, then do the recording again. Recording starts 4 Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC] button. NOTE • If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording a style track, an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will stop. or When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a box border. 5 Save the song. When recording is stopped a message asking if you want to save the song will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to save the song, or the [-/NO] button if you don’t want to save the song. If saved, the song will be stored as a MIDI file in song number 031–035. If you press the [-/NO] button in response to the confirmation message the song will not be saved as a MIDI file but will remain in the instrument’s memory until the power is turned off, so you have the option of converting the song to a MIDI file and saving it later. To do this press and hold the [REC] button until the save confirmation message appears, then press the [+/YES] button. 62 Owner’s Manual CAUTION • The recorded Song data will be lost if you turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Record Your Own Performance ● To Record Other Tracks Repeat steps 2 through 5 to record any of the remaining tracks. By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the border around the track number will appear in the display). You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the border around the track number disappears in the display) while recording new tracks. ● To Re-record a Track Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The new material will overwrite the previous data. 6 When the recording is done ... ◆ To Play Back a User Song User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 32). 1 Press the [SONG] button from the MAIN display. 2 The current song number/name will be highlighted—use the dial to select the user song (031–035) you want to play. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. ◆ To save a User Song to USB flash memory ➔ page 99. ● Data that cannot be recorded • Split voice • The following items are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes made during the song will not be recorded. Time signature, Style number, Style volume Song Clear—Deleting User Songs This function clears an entire user song (all tracks). 1 2 NOTE From the SONG SELECT display select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. • If you only want to clear a specific track from a user song use the Track Clear function. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. Hold for longer than a second Press and hold Owner’s Manual 63 Record Your Own Performance 3 Press the [+] button to clear the song. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song is being cleared. Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song. 1 2 From the SONG SELECT display select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. Hold for longer than a second 3 64 Press the [+] button to clear the track. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. Owner’s Manual Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below. ● The Backup Parameters • Registration Memory • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Language Selection, Sustain, Sound Type, Chord Fingering Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. ■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, registration memory—turn the power on by pressing the power switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. Power switch ■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear User Songs as well as Song, Style, and Music Database files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the power switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys. CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, data you have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to save data you want to keep to a computer. Power switch Owner’s Manual 65 Basic Operation Basic Operation Overall control is based on the following simple operations. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. 3 Start a function. 3 Start a function. 1 Select a basic function. 2 Select an item or value. Display (pages 68, 69) ● Volume Adjustment Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones plugged into the PHONES jack. Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson. Select an auto-accompaniment style. Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard. 66 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 2 Use the dial to select an item or value When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be listed in the display. You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item. The currently selected item is highlighted in the display. In this example the [VOICE] button has been pressed. ■Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● r Jump to the first item in the next or previous category. r Increase f Decrease The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for selecting categorized items, as in the example below. Example: VOICE SELECT Display r ] mark. f CATEGORY button [ CATEGORY button [ Press briefly to decrement. Press briefly to increment. Select the category shown here. The first voice in the selected category is selected. In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when you have to select from a large number of voices. f ● Number Buttons [0]–[9] The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number or parameter value. Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below). Example: Song number “003” can be entered in three ways. • [0] → [0] → [3] • [0] → [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) • [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. ] mark. r ● [+] and [-] Buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increment the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrement the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment or decrement the value in the corresponding direction. ● CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons When selecting a song, style, or voice, you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. f ● Dial Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial continuously to continuously increase or decrease the value. In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] buttons. 3 Start a function. This is the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm). Owner’s Manual 67 Basic Operation The Displays ● Display Names All operations are carried out while watching the display. A number of display types are provided for different modes and functions. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display. ● MAIN Display Title To Return To the MAIN Display Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN display. You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the [EXIT] button near the lower right corner of the display panel. r f ● FUNCTION Display (page 92) The FUNCTION display provides access to 49 utility functions. The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you can use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons (page 67) to select 49 different groups of functions. Press the CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the number [0]–[9] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required. Function item Value The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a range of functions. 68 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation MAIN Display Items The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. * Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on the panel of the instrument for optimum display legibility. A-B Repeat Tempo Appears when repeat playback is engaged. Measure Number Transpose Function ON/Off Icons Dual Appears when the Dual Voice is on. When this icon is showing a second voice is “layered” on and played with the main voice. Chord Display Split Style (Auto-accompaniment) Status (page 27) Registration Memory Status (page 90) Appears when the Split Voice is on. When this icon is showing different voices can be played to the left and right of the keyboard split point. Performance assistant technology Appears when the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button is pressed to turn accompaniment on after selecting a style. When showing the keyboard range to the left of the split point is used for accompaniment chord recognition. Shows the selected bank number. Shows the memory numbers that contain data. A border appears around the selected number. Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. The style pattern name. Song Track Status (pages 60, 89) Appears when the performance assistant technology is on. Harmony Appears when Harmony is on. When this icon is showing harmony notes will be added to the main voice. File Control When this icon is showing you can control file operations. Highlighted during user song recording. The track(s) selected for recording are highlighted during user-song recording. Only tracks that contain data are displayed. A border appears around a selected track that is being played. No border appears around a Muted track. Owner’s Manual 69 Reference Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Harmony This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn Harmony feature on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again. The currently selected harmony type 3 Use the dial to select a harmony type. When harmony is on the harmony icon will appear in the display. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 137 for information about the available harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the below section “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List for details. NOTE • When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main voice is automatically selected. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/ OFF] button for longer than a second. The currently selected harmony type will be displayed. NOTE • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). Hold for longer than a second. ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 19 to 22 (Tremolo) • Harmony type 01 to 10, 13 Keep holding down the keys. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 27). Hold down two keys. • Harmony type 15 to 18 (Echo) Keep holding down the keys. 70 Owner’s Manual • Harmony type 23 to 26 (Trill) You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 94). Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Reverb Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 138 for information about the available reverb types. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to select a reverb type. You can check how the selected reverb type sounds by playing on the keyboard. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Reverb Type item. Selected reverb type. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 138 for information about the available reverb types. Reverb Type item ● Adjusting the Reverb Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 93). Owner’s Manual 71 Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Chorus The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison. When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to select a chorus type. You can check how the selected chorus type sounds by playing on the keyboard. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Chorus Type item. Selected chorus type. Chorus Type item ● Adjusting the Chorus Level You can individually adjust the amount of chorus that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 93). 72 Owner’s Manual Play with a Variety of Effects Adding DSP DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor. The DSP effect can be added to the Main and Dual Voices. These range from reverb-like ambience effects to distortion and other dynamic processing tools that let you enhance the sound, or completely transform it. 1 Use the [DSP ON/OFF] button to turn the DSP function on. The indicator lights when DSP is on. To turn DSP off, press the [DSP ON/OFF] button again. 3 Use the dial to select a DSP type. Refer to the DSP Type List on page 140 for information about the available DSP types. NOTE • When DSP is turned on, the optimum DSP type for the current Voice is automatically selected. • The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when turning DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The amount of change differs depending on the selected Voice. • The DSP type is an overall setting–only one type can be selected. For this reason, when you play a newly loaded Song or Style, for example, the currently playing Voices may not sound as expected. This is normal, since the Song or Style has its own DSP type which replaces any selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phenomenon occurs when you use the [FF], [REW] buttons or A-B Repeat function during song playback. 2 Press and hold the [DSP ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The currently selected DSP type will be displayed. Currently selected DSP type. ● Adjusting the DSP Level You can individually adjust the amount of DSP that is applied to the main and dual voices. (See page 93). Hold for longer than a second DSP Type Owner’s Manual 73 Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Sustain This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all times, regardless of damper operation. The sustain function does not affect split voice. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 3 You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons to turn sustain on or off. NOTE • The sustain of some voices may not be markedly affected when the sustain function is turned on. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 74 Owner’s Manual r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Sustain item. The current setting is displayed. Handy Performance Features Tap Start You can start the song/style by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during song playback by pressing the button just twice. Touch Response Sensitivity You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 3 Use the dial to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics —i.e. greater sensitivity. A setting of “4” results in a fixed touch response, or no level change no matter how hard or how soft you play the keys. NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Touch Sensitivity item. The currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. Touch Sensitivity item Owner’s Manual 75 Handy Performance Features One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2 on page 17). 4 Use the dial to change songs, then play the keyboard and listen to the voice. You should hear a different keyboard voice than you played in step 3. Watch the display while changing songs and you will see that different voices are selected for each song. Use the dial to select voice number 000. 2 Select and play back any song (steps 1 to 3 on page 33). 3 Play the keyboard and remember the sound of the voice. If you have stopped playback at some point during this procedure press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. 76 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Select a Sound Type Select a sound type for the internal speakers from piano sound or style sound. 1 Press and hold the [PIANO PRESET] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second. The currently selected sound type will appear. The currently selected sound type. 2 Use the dial to select the desired Sound Type. Select Piano when you want to play only a piano sound, or select Style when you want to play a style. NOTE • When using headphones the normal sound is applied. This function can also be set by using the [FUNCTION] button (see page 93). Owner’s Manual 77 Handy Performance Features Pitch Controls ◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose) The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. ◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning) The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Transpose item Tuning item Can be set between -12 and +12 3 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. 78 Owner’s Manual r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Tuning item. f r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Transpose item. Can be set between -100 and +100 3 Use the dial to set the tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 26 of the Quick Guide. Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment procedure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more. Pattern Variation (Sections) This instrument features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing to section A or B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. Owner’s Manual 79 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a style. 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. The name of the selected section—MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed. 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Appears when auto accompaniment is on. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn synchro start on. The indicator will flash when the synchro start standby mode will be engaged. You’re now ready to play the intro. 6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 31. Split point Accompaniment range ● Synchro Start When the synchro start standby mode is engaged, style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button again. 80 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. ● Synchro Stop When this function is selected the accompaniment style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. The style will play while you are playing the keys Style playback will stop when you release the keys Owner’s Manual 81 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Setting the Split Point The initial default split point is key number 054 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. Split point (054: F#2) 021 (A-1) 024 (C0) 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) 108 (C7) Main voice Split voice 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the split point to any key from 021(A-1) through 108 (C7). NOTE • When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point also changes. • The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson. • The split voice sounds when the split-point key is played. NOTE 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 82 Owner’s Manual r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Split point item. r f • You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the item (page 92). Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used (page 31). Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on after pressing the [STYLE] button. Accompaniment range Appears when auto accompaniment is on Adjusting the Style Volume 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Style Volume item. f Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the style volume between 000 and 127. Owner’s Manual 83 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Chord Basics Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”. The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale). 3rd 3rd Root In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes. The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third. Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones) The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two additional chords, as shown below. Minor chord Cm Major chord CM Minor 3rd Major 3rd Augmented chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Diminished chord C dim Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”). ● Reading Chord Names Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance. Cm Root note Chord type ● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by this instrument.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5 th Perfect 4 th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th 84 Owner’s Manual Minor chord Major chord Flatted 7 th C M7 Minor chord Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th (b5) (b5) C m7 C7 Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7 th Minor 7 th C7 7 th chord Flatted 5 th Minor 7 th chord Major 7 th Major chord 7 th, suspended 4 th C 7sus4 Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions ■Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords. Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Major [M] 1-3-5 C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6 Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 C M7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C M7 Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 C M7 Display C (9) C9 C6 (9) C 69 * CM7 (9) C M79 * (#11) CM7#11 * (b5) Cb5 * (b5) Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 C M7 CM7b5 * Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 C sus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 C aug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 C M7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm9 Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 C m6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) C m7 Cm711 * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 C (9) (9) (11) (9) (b5) C m7 Cdim7 1 - b3 - b5 C dim7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7 Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] Cm7b5 CmM7b5 * Diminished [dim] Seventh ninth [7(9)] CmM79 * C mM7 C dim (b5) Diminished seventh [dim7] Seventh [7] Cm7 Cm79 C7 Cdim C7 (b9) C7b9 C7 (b13) C7b13 (9) C 79 (#11) C7#11 (13) C713 (#9) 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 C7#9 Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C 7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C 7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - b7 C 7sus4 C7sus4 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 C sus2 Csus2 * * These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function. NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2. NOTE • Inversion of the m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Owner’s Manual 85 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard In “Play Along with a Style” on page 27 we described a method of playing styles in which chords were detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By making the settings described below, however, chord detection for style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even more dynamic style performance. In this mode only chords played in the normal way (page 31) can be detected. 1 Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to select the function “Chord Fingering”. Hold for longer than a second 86 Owner’s Manual 2 Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the LESSON [START] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Notation of chord Chord name (root and type) 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. • Be aware that the chord types explained here are the left-hand notes applied to various styles and different from the one for the performance assistant technology feature. 4 Try playing a chord in the auto accom- paniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flash. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Owner’s Manual 87 Song Settings Song Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Song volume item Can be set between 000 and 127 2 Use the CATEGORY [ f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Song Volume item. 3 Use the dial to set the song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected. A-B Repeat You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A 2 Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec- ond time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). B 1 Play the song (page 32) and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). 3 The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. NOTE • Repeat start and end points cannot be specified within the same measure While the song is stopped. • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song. 88 Owner’s Manual Song Settings Muting Independent Song Parts Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. To mute a track, press the appropriate track button (TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same button a second time to disengage track muting. No track number ... no data. Track number without border ... track contains data but is muted. Track number with border ... track contains data and is not muted. Change the Melody Voice You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer. Press the lesson [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously so that “LR” appears in the upper right corner of the MAIN display. Select the song and play it. 2 Use the dial to select the voice. As you select different melody voices, only the melody voice changes while the song will remain the same. 1 Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. The VOICE SELECT (MELODY R or MELODY L) display will appear so you can select the Melody R or Melody L voice. Pressing the [VOICE] button alternates between VOICE SELECT MELODY R and MELODY L. Hold for longer than a second Owner’s Manual 89 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of two setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Up to 16 presets (eight banks of two each) can be memorized. Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required— select a voice, accompaniment style, etc. 2 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A 4 Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2] button while holding the [MEMORY/ BANK] button to store the current panel settings to the specified registration memory. bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display in order to check the bank and registration memory numbers. Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but- tons to select a bank number from 1 to 8. Bank number NOTE • You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration memory button into USB flash memory as the user file or to a computer as the backup file. NOTE NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song playback. • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. CAUTION • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. 90 Owner’s Manual Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory 1 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. ● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory • Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering Bank number 2 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you want to recall. • Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level) • Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Sustain ON/OFF, DSP ON/OFF, DSP Type • Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume • Other settings Transpose * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. You can check whether the panel settings are stored in registration memory 1 or 2 by pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1] or [2], containing the settings you want to recall. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. Owner’s Manual 91 The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tuning, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the function list starting on the opposite page. There are 49 function parameters in all. When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display name and adjust as required. Selecting and Setting Functions 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on page 93. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the selected function as required. The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/ OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF. In some cases the [+] button will initiate execution of the selected function, and the [-] will cancel the selection. Direct numeric entry. 3 Select a function. Function category Previous item r f Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. Next item The selected function Value 92 Owner’s Manual • Decrement value by 1. • OFF • Cancel • Increment value by 1. • ON • Execute Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 65 for information on the function settings that are stored on the instrument. To restore all initial factor default settings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initialization” section on page 65. The Functions ● Function Setting List Category Function Item Range/Settings Description Style Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose -12–+12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning -100–+100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Split Point 021(A-1)–108(C7) Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity 1(Soft), 2(Medium), 3(Hard), 4 (Off) Determines the sensitivity of the feature. Chord Fingering 1(Multi Finger), 2(FullKeyboard) Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal chords and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In the Full Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard will be detected, and the notes played will be sound as well. Main Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice. Main Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice. Main Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Main Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Main Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Main DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Dual Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice. Dual Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Dual Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Dual Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Dual Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Split Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice. Split Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice. Split Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Split Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Split Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. VOLUME OVERALL MAIN VOICE DUAL VOICE SPLIT VOICE Reverb Type 01–36 Determines the Reverb type, including off. (See the list on page 138) Chorus Type 01–45 Determines the Chorus type, including off. (See the list on page 139) DSP Type 001–239 Determines the DSP type, including off. (See the list on page 140) Sustain ON/OFF Determines whether or not sustain is always applied to the MAIN/DUAL voices. It is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. (page 74) Sound Type Piano/Style Determines the sound type, optimizing it either for a simple, pure piano sound, or for a wide, dynamic multi-instrument style sound. EFFECT Owner’s Manual 93 The Functions Category Function Item Range/Settings Description Harmony Type 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 137) Harmony Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. PAT P.A.T. Type CHORD, CHORD/FREE, MELODY, CHORD/MELODY Determines the performance assistant technology feature type. (See the list on page 39) PC PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 105). Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 105) External Clock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 105) Keyboard Out ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Song playback. Initial Setup YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel. Time Signature Numerator 01–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator 2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat. Bell ON/OFF Determines whether a bell accent will be sounded (ON) or not (OFF). Metronome Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Quantize 1(1/4 note), 2(1/4 note triplet), 3(1/8 note), 4(1/8 note triplet), 5(1/16 note), 6(1/16 note triplet), 7(1/32 note), 8(1/32 note triplet) Depending on the song data, you can make the score more readable by adjusting the timing of the notes. This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the song. For example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the song, you should set this value to “eighth note”. Any notes or rests shorter than this value will not be shown in the score. Right-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer. Left-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer. Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. Demo Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. English/Japanese Determines the display language for the demo displays, song file names, lyrics and certain display messages. All other messages and names are displayed in English. When this is set to Japanese, the file names are displayed in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language setting originally made in the song data; however, when no such setting exists, the setting here is used. HARMONY MIDI METRONOME SCORE LESSON UTILITY LANGUAGE Language * All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.) 94 Owner’s Manual Saving and Loading Data USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data. When a USB flash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, registered settings can be saved from or loaded into the instrument. USB flash memory can also be used to transfer Song, Style, and Music Database files to the instrument, where they can be selected and used in the same way as the internal data. In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them. Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 96. Connecting a USB Flash Memory 1 Connect a USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful to insert it with the proper orientation. 2 Check that the file control icon is shown in the MAIN display. Appears while the memory device is being mounted. File Control Icon A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the display to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Messages” on page 112 for an explanation of each message. You can go to the FILE CONTROL display from which you can access file operations by pressing the [MENU] button from this display. (Do not press this button now, but only when instructed to in the sections below.) Menu Reference Page Format 97 User File Save 98 User Song Save 99 Load 100 USB Delete 101 User Delete 102 NOTE • No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related to file functions will be active. NOTE • The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following cases: • During style or song playback. • During a lesson. • While data is being loaded from a USB flash memory. Owner’s Manual 95 Saving and Loading Data ■ Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE • Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. ● Compatible USB devices • USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive) The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: ● Using USB Storage Devices By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. NOTE • Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. http://download.yamaha.com/ NOTE • Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. ● Connecting USB device • When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. The number of USB storage device to be used Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 97). CAUTION CAUTION • Do not close the key cover when a USB device is connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Doing so can damage the USB device. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save and Delete operations). CAUTION • Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. 96 Owner’s Manual Saving and Loading Data Formatting USB Flash Memory New USB flash memory must be formatted before they can be used by this instrument. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or CAUTION • If you format a USB flash memory that already contains data, all of the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data when using the format function. the [+] button, and the format operation will begin. CAUTION 1 After connecting the USB flash memory to be formatted to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, check that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. • Once the format-in-progress message appears on the display the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 6 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 2 NOTE Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Format item. The display prompts you for confirmation. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button and the display prompts you for confirmation. You can press the [-] button at this point to cancel the operation. Owner’s Manual 97 Saving and Loading Data Saving Registration Memory data to USB Flash Memory This operation saves Registration Memory data as a “User File” to a USB flash memory device. The User File name will have a “.usr” extension which will not appear in the instrument’s display. 1 Make sure that a properly formatted USB flash memory has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. r f 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but- Cursor left tons to locate the Regist Save item. A default file name will automatically be created. Delete character The dial selects characters Cursor right Cursor 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis● To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 6. NOTE • Up to 100 user files can be saved to a single USB flash memory. • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. • If there is not enough capacity left on the USB flash memory to save the data an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted files from the USB flash memory to make more memory available (page 101), or use a different USB flash memory. • Refer to the “Messages” list on page 112 for other possible errors that might prevent you from completing the operation. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. 5 Change the file name as necessary. • The [-] button moves the cursor to the left, and the [0] button moves it to the right. • Use the dial to select a character for the current cursor location. • The [+] button deletes the character at the cursor location. 98 Owner’s Manual 7 play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the save operation will begin. The file will be stored to the USER FILE folder in the USB flash memory. CAUTION • Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 8 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash memory. Saving and Loading Data Save a User Song to USB Flash Memory This operation saves a user song (song numbers 031–035) to USB flash memory. 1 Make sure that a properly formatted USB flash memory has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. 7 Change the file name as necessary. Refer to “Saving Registration Memory data to USB Flash Memory” on page 98 for filename entry. 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to locate the User Song Save item. The SOURCE FILE—a user song name—will be highlighted. Cursor The name of the file to be saved 8 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis- play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 9 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or The source user song name. the [+] button, and the save operation will begin. The user song will be stored to the USER FILE folder in the USB flash memory. CAUTION 4 Use the dial to select the source user song. You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to select the first user song. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The DESTINATION SONG will be highlighted, and a default name will automatically be created. ● To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 7. • Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 10 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash memory. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. Owner’s Manual 99 Saving and Loading Data Loading Files from a USB Flash Memory User files as well as Style, Song, and Music Database files residing on a USB flash memory can be loaded into the instrument. 4 Use the dial to select the file you want CAUTION • If you load a User File registration memory data will be overwritten by the newly loaded data. Save important data to a USB flash memory before loading data that will overwrite it. 1 With the USB flash memory containing the file you want to load connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector, check that the File Control icon is shown in the MAIN display. to load. All user files in the USB flash memory will be displayed first, followed by the style files, song files and music database files. Files must be located in the “User Files” folder in the USB flash memory. Files located outside of that folder will not be recognized. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis- play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the load operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to locate the Load item. the [+] button, and the load operation will begin. CAUTION • Once the load-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 7 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 100 Owner’s Manual Saving and Loading Data Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory This procedure deletes User, Style, Song, and Music Database files from a USB flash memory. 1 Make sure that the USB flash memory containing the file(s) you want to delete has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. 4 Use the dial to select the file you want to delete. All User files in the USB flash memory will be displayed first, followed by the style files, song files and music database files. Files must be located in the “User Files” folder in the USB flash memory. Files located outside of that folder will not be recognized. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to locate the USB Delete item. play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the delete operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the delete operation will begin. CAUTION • Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 7 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. Owner’s Manual 101 Saving and Loading Data Delete User Data from the Instrument This procedure deletes the User Song as well as Style, Song, and Music Database files transferred from an external device such as a computer. This operation does not erase the preset data. r f 1 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the User Delete item. Only “User Delete” can be selected if no USB flash memory is connected to the instrument. All user songs will be displayed first, followed by the song, style and music database files. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the delete operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the delete operation will begin. CAUTION • Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. 6 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Use the dial to select the file you want to delete. Playing Files Located on a USB Flash Memory IMPORTANT • In order to play data copied to a USB flash memory from a computer or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB flash memory’s root directory or a first-level/second-level folder in the root directory. Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a second-level folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument. 1 Make sure that the USB flash memory containing the file you want to play has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. USB flash memory (Root) Song File Song File Can be selected/played. 2 Press the [SONG], [STYLE] or [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Files of the corresponding type will be displayed. Song File Song File 3 Use the dial to select the file you want Cannot be selected/played. to play. 4 Play the selected file in the same way the internal files are played: press the [START/STOP] button, or play on the keyboard. 102 Owner’s Manual Connections Connectors q w USB TO HOST q USB TO DEVICE terminal This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices. Refer to “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” on page 96. w USB TO HOST terminal This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 104 for more information. Owner’s Manual 103 Connections Connecting a Personal Computer The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer. ● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 105). ● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 107). The connection procedure is as follows: 1 Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com- puter. The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”. 2 Connect the USB terminal of the computer to the USB terminal on the instrument using an AB type USB cable (USB cable sold separately). The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft Downloader application that allows you to transfer song files from your computer to the instrument’s flash memory. For instructions about how to install Musicsoft Downloader (refer to included “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”) and how to transfer song files (refer to page 107). USB TO HOST terminal Computer USB TO HOST USB cable 104 Owner’s Manual ■ Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminal When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard or play back a song, etc.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. Connections Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. ● When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance data. USB TO HOST terminal USB terminal Computer USB TO HOST USB cable ■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. Item Range/Settings Description Local ON/OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. External Clock ON/OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). Keyboard Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. NOTE 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely may be caused by Local Control being set to off. NOTE • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. 3 Use the dial to select ON or OFF. Owner’s Manual 105 Connections ■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring song or backup files between the computer and the instrument. 1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second so that the PC Mode item appears. Hold for longer than a second. * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. PC1 PC2* Local OFF OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON 2 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo, song recording, and lesson features cannot be used. NOTE r f • You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate it (page 92). Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel. ■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (A-1 and A#-1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). A#-1 A-1 C7: Fast forward B6: Start A6: Stop G6: Rewind F6: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E6: Metronome ON/OFF 106 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. Connections Initial Send This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Initial Send item. Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument Songs, styles, or Music Database files residing on a computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument. Backup file can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. In order to transfer files between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft Downloader application and the USBMIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer. Refer to the included “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” for installation details. ● Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument. • Data Capacity: 1895KB 502 files total for the Song, Style and Music Database. • Data Format Song: .mid SMF format 0/1 Style: .sty Music Database: .mfd Backup File: 09DP88.BUP ● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. ■With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Transfer files from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 108. The procedure for transferring songs included on the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to the instrument is given as an example. ● Backup file can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 109. Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. Owner’s Manual 107 Connections ■Use Musicsoft Downloader To Transfer Songs From the Accessory CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash memory ● ● ● ● ● NOTE • If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (refer to “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”). At this point you can select a Style or Music Database file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer it to the instrument in the same way as a song file. 6 A copy of the selected MIDI song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click “Instrument”, and then “Flash memory”. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 3 Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. 4 Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 5 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the CD-ROM drive from the drop-down menu that appears. Doubleclick the “SampleData” Folder on the window. Select the file from the “SongData” Folder you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. q Click the CD-ROM drive q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” 7 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily”, click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. NOTE • Files transferred to a USB flash memory root directory using the Musicsoft Downloader—any location outside the USER FILES folder on the USB flash memory device—cannot be deleted via the instrument’s file control display. Use the Musicsoft Downloader delete button to delete such files. w Double-click “SampleData” Folder ➝ “SongData” Folder, and click a song file. 108 Owner’s Manual e Click “Open” Connections 8 Close the window to end the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from your computer. 9 To playback a song stored in flash memory, press the [SONG] button. Use the dial to select the song you want to play, then press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. CAUTION • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. ■Transfer a Backup file from the instrument to a computer ● ● ● You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer “Backup” files containing Registration Memory and FUNCTION settings (page 65) to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file named “09DP88.BUP” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup file. For details about how to transfer backup files using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the application. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument. CAUTION • Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. CAUTION • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. r f ● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons... In order to use songs (only SMF format 0 and 1) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song (036–) residing in flash memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. CAUTION • The backup file is transmitted/received as a single file. As a result, all registration memory data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. Owner’s Manual 109 Appendix Troubleshooting ■ For the Instrument Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES] jack on the bottom. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 105.) Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard, etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 87), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 105. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 93) is set to an appropriate level. The style does not sound properly. Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 82). Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number 131 or a style between 143–160 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 131 and style numbers 143– 160 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 64 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. The damper pedal has no effect even when damper pedal is pressed. The pedal cord may not be properly connected. Make sure securely insert the pedal cord into the [PEDAL] jack (page 116). The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or there are Japanese characters in the display messages. Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to English. (See page 16) The appropriate display does not appear when the [SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], or [VOICE] button is pressed. Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons. 110 Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off. The ACMP indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. There is no harmony sound. The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types 01–10, 13 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range. Types 15–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 23–26 you need to play two notes at the same time. The “OverCurrent” message is shown in the upper area of the MAIN display and the USB device does not respond. Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Owner’s Manual 111 Messages LCD Message Comment Access error! Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the flash memory. All Memory Clearing... Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power off during data transmission. Are you sure? Confirms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not. Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the flash memory. Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled. Can’t clear TrackA. Displayed when a track clear error occurs. Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs. Com Mode Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played back. Completed Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission. Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application. Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data. Delete File Displayed while deleting a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. Delete OK ? Confirms whether the Delete job is executed or not. Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader. Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged. End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed. Error! Displayed when writing has failed. Exit. Displayed when the record standby mode is exited because an inappropriate style has been selected during style record standby. “File information area is not large enough.” Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total number of files have become too many. File is not found. Indicates there is no file. “File too large. Loading is impossible.” Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too large. Flash Clearing... Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal flash memory. Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Confirms whether formatting the media is executed or not. Formatting... Displayed while formatting. Load OK ? Confirms whether loading is executed or not. Loading... Displayed while loading data. Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted. Media capacity is full. Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory becomes full. Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during song recording. “MIDI receive buffer overflow.” Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to proceed. Move File Displayed while moving a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. “Now Writing... (Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise the data may be damaged.)” Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while writing. Doing so may result in data loss. 112 Owner’s Manual Messages LCD Message Comment OverCurrent Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Overwrite ? Confirms whether overwriting is executed or not. Please Wait... Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying scores and lyrics, or stopping recording. Rename File Displayed while rewriting the file name in the Musicsoft Downloader. Save OK ? Confirms whether saving is executed or not. Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist. Saving... Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while saving. Doing so may result in data loss. Send OK? Confirms whether the data transmission is executed or not. Sending... Displayed while transmitting data. “Since the media is in use now, this function is not available.” Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the media is being accessed. Style data is too large to load. Indicates that style data cannot be loaded since the style data is too large. Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconfirms whether each operation is executed or not. “The limit of the media has been reached.” Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory structure has become too complicated. The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted. “The media is write-protected.” Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-protected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use. “The song data is too large to be converted to notation.” Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too large. There are too many files. Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files exceeds the capacity. “This function is not available now.” Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is executing another job. [nnn] “file name” Indicates the file name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the receiving block. NOTE • Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages necessary to be explained only. Owner’s Manual 113 Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Assemble the stand on a hard and flat floor with ample space. • Be sure to use the included screws only, and insert screws of the correct size in the correct hole locations. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product. • Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items. 6 x 20 mm long screws (x 4) A 6 x 16 mm short screws (x 4) 4 x 12 mm thin screws (x 2) Foamed styrol pads 4 x 20 mm tapping screws (x 4) B 4 x 10 mm thin screws (x 2) C AC power cord (x 1) Bundled pedal cord inside Headphone hanger (x 1) D E Cord holders (x 2) Adjuster (x 1) 114 Owner’s Manual Keyboard Stand Assembly 1 3 Attach the adjuster to C. 1-1 Align the tip of the adjuster with the screw hole, then screw in the adjuster all the way until it stops turning. You will adjust the height of the adjuster in Step 8. 1-2 Untie and straighten out the bundled cord. Attach B. 3-1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and E, then attach the upper side to D and E. 3-2 Attach the top of B to D and E by finger-tight- ening the thin screws (4 x 12mm). 3-3 While pushing the lower outside part of D and E towards each other, secure the bottom of B at each end using two tapping screws (4 x 20mm). Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in Step 7. 3-4 Insert the other two tapping screws (4 x 20mm) into the other two screw holes to secure B. 1-1 1-2 3-5 While pushing D and E towards each other, securely tighten the screws that were fingertightened in Step 3-2. C 2 3-2 3-5 Attach (finger-tighten) D and E to C. 2-1 Align D and E with each end of C. E 2-2 Attach D and E to C by finger-tightening the long screws (6 x 20mm). D B E 3-3 2-2 3-4 D C 4 Secure C. 4-1 Securely tighten the screws on C that were attached in Step 2-2. D B E C 4-1 Owner’s Manual 115 Keyboard Stand Assembly 5 7 Mount A. 5-1 Place your hands at least 15 cm from either end of A when positioning it. Connect the pedal cord and the power cord. 7-1 Insert the pedal cord plug to the pedal connec- tor from the rear. 7-2 Attach the cord holders to B, then clip the cord into the holders. 7-3 Use a vinyl tie to bundle the pedal cord. A 7-4 For models that feature a voltage selector: Set the voltage selector to an appropriate voltage. E D At least 15 cm 6 Secure A. 6-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right ends of A will project beyond D and E equally when seen from the front. 6-2 Secure A by tightening the short screws (6 x 16mm) from the front. Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. WARNING • An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to this instrument or result in improper operation. 7-5 Insert the AC power cord plug into the AC 6-1 A INLET. Projection of A L DA PE 7-1 A 6-2 7-3 7-5 116 Owner’s Manual 7-4 7-2 Keyboard Stand Assembly 8 Set the adjuster. ■ After completing the assembly, please check the following. 8-1 Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm con- tact with the floor surface. • Are there any parts left over? ➔ Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is this instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? ➔ Move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does this instrument make a rattling noise when you shake it? ➔ Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? ➔ Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. 9 Attach the headphone hanger. 9-1 Install the headphone hanger using included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? ➔ Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. CAUTION • When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Do not hold here. ■ Remove the protective tapes Open the key cover and remove the protective tape on each side of the keyboard. Hold here. Owner’s Manual 117 Index Panel controls and terminals 118 Owner’s Manual r f +/– .................................................. 15, 67 ........................................................ 68 0–9 .................................................. 15, 67 A-B REPEAT ................................. 15, 88 ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 15, 27 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] ........... 15, 67 DEMO ............................................ 15, 32 Dial ................................................. 15, 67 DSP ON/OFF ................................. 15, 73 DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 15, 18 EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 15, 58 EXECUTE ...................................... 15, 97 EXIT ............................................... 15, 68 FF ................................................... 15, 34 FILE CONTROL ........................... 15, 95 FUNCTION .................................... 15, 92 HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 15, 70 INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 15, 79 LCD CONTRAST ................................ 69 LESSON L, R ................................. 15, 51 LESSON START ........................... 15, 50 LYRICS .......................................... 15, 38 MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 15, 79 MASTER VOLUME ........................... 15 MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 15, 90 MENU ............................................ 15, 95 METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 15, 23 MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 15, 57 P.A.T. ON/OFF ........................ 15, 40, 48 PAUSE ........................................... 15, 34 PC ....................................................... 106 PEDAL ................................................. 15 PHONES .............................................. 15 PIANO RESET .............................. 15, 20 REC, 1–5, A ................................... 15, 60 REGIST. MEMORY ...................... 15, 90 REPEAT & LEARN ...................... 15, 56 REW ............................................... 15, 34 SCORE ........................................... 15, 37 SONG ............................................. 15, 33 SONG MEMORY .......................... 15, 61 SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 15, 19 STANDBY/ON .................................... 15 START/STOP ................................ 15, 67 STYLE ............................... 15, 26–30, 79 SYNC START ......................... 15, 27, 80 SYNC STOP .................................. 15, 81 TEMPO/TAP ...................... 15, 23, 34, 75 USB TO DEVICE ........................ 15, 103 USB TO HOST ............................ 15, 104 VOICE ............................................ 15, 17 Alphabetical order A E A-B Repeat ...........................................88 Accessories .............................................7 ACMP ...................................................27 Auto Accompaniment Range ................27 Auto-Accompaniment ..............27, 29, 31 Easy Chords ......................................... 31 Easy Song Arranger ............................. 58 Effect Type List ................................. 138 External Clock .............................. 94, 105 External Song ....................................... 36 B F Backup ..........................................65, 109 Bell ........................................................25 File Control .......................................... 95 File Name ............................................. 98 Flash Memory ...................................... 36 Format (File Control) ........................... 97 Function ................................... 68, 92–94 Function Display .................................. 68 C CD-ROM ............................................144 Chord ..................................29–31, 84–85 Chord Dictionary ..................................87 Chord Fingering ..............................31, 86 Chord root .............................................87 Chord type (Chord Dictionary) .............87 Chord type (performance assistant technology) ...................39–40 Chord/Free type (performance assistant technology) ...................39, 42 Chord/Melody type (performance assistant technology) ...................39, 46 Chorus ...................................................72 Chorus Type .......................................139 Computer ............................104–105, 107 G Grade .................................................... 53 H Harmony ............................................... 70 Harmony Type ................................... 138 Harmony Volume ................................. 94 Headphones .......................................... 12 I Initial Send ......................................... 107 Initialization ......................................... 65 D Default Setting ......................................92 Delete (Song Track) ..............................64 Delete (USB flash memory) ...............101 Delete (User Data) ..............................102 Delete (User Song) ...............................63 Demo ....................................................32 Demo Cancel ........................................94 Display ............................................68–69 Double-Staff Score ...............................37 Drum Kit ...............................................22 Drum Kit List ......................................132 DSP .......................................................73 DSP Type ......................................73, 140 Dual Chorus Level ................................93 Dual Octave ..........................................93 Dual Pan ...............................................93 Dual Reverb Level ................................93 Dual Voice ............................................18 Dual Volume .........................................93 K Keyboard Out ............................... 94, 105 Keyboard Stand Assembly ................. 114 L Language .............................................. 16 Lesson .................................................. 50 Load ................................................... 100 Local ............................................. 94, 105 L-Part ........................................... 94, 109 Lyric ..................................................... 38 M Main Chorus Level ............................... 93 MAIN Display ...................................... 68 Main Octave ......................................... 93 Main Pan .............................................. 93 Main Reverb Level ............................... 93 Main Voice ........................................... 17 Main Volume ....................................... 93 Measure ................................................ 69 Melody ........................................... 37, 49 Index Melody Score ....................................... 37 Melody type (performance assistant technology) .................. 39, 44 Melody Voice ................................. 59, 89 Messages ............................................ 112 Metronome ........................................... 23 MIDI ................................................... 105 MIDI Data Format .................................. 7 MIDI Implementation Chart ................... 7 Music Database .................................... 57 Music Rest ............................................ 10 Mute ..................................................... 89 N notation ................................................. 69 O One Touch Setting ................................ 76 P P.A.T. Type .................................... 39, 94 PC Mode ............................................. 106 Pedal ..................................................... 21 performance assistant technology ........ 39 Preset Song ............................... 32, 35–36 Q Quantize ............................................... 94 R Recording ............................................. 60 Registration Memory ........................... 90 Remote control ................................... 106 Repeat ............................................. 56, 88 Reverb .................................................. 71 Reverb Type ....................................... 138 R-Part ........................................... 94, 109 Specifications ......................................144 Split Chorus Level ................................93 Split Octave ..........................................93 Split Pan ................................................93 Split Point .......................................19, 82 Split Reverb Level ................................93 Split Voice ............................................19 Split Volume .........................................93 Standard Chords ...................................31 Style ..........................................26, 29, 79 Style File .............................................100 Style List .............................................134 Style Out .......................................94, 105 Style Volume ........................................83 Sustain ............................................74, 93 Synchro Start ..................................27, 80 Synchro Stop .........................................81 T Tempo .............................................34, 75 TimeSignature (Denominator, Numerator) ...............24 Touch Response ....................................75 Touch Sensitivity ..................................75 Track .....................................................60 Track Clear ...........................................64 Transfer .......................................105, 107 Transpose ..............................................78 Troubleshooting ..................................110 Tuning ...................................................78 U USB ....................................................103 USB-MIDI driver .................................11 User file ........................................98, 100 User File Save .......................................98 User Song .......................................36, 60 V S Save (User File) .................................... 98 Save (User Song) .................................. 99 Score ....................................... 37, 49, 120 Single-Staff Score ................................ 37 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................. 107 Song ...................................................... 33 Song Clear ............................................ 63 Song List .............................................. 35 Song Memory ................................. 60–61 Song Out ....................................... 94, 105 Song Volume ........................................ 88 Sound Type .................................... 77, 93 Voice .....................................................17 Voice List ...........................................126 X XF .....................................................6, 38 XGlite .....................................................6 Owner’s Manual 119 Scores Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece. Song No. 9 q =123 (Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger) Hallelujah Chorus 120 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 121 Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 10 q =61 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Ave Maria P.A.T. Type =CHORD Your Turn. Repeatedly Play the Same Key. 122 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 123 Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 11 q =108 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Nocturne op.9-2 P.A.T. Type =CHORD/FREE 124 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 125 Voice List Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces ■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The instrument has 64-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 64 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). ■ Maximale Polyphonie ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Das Instrument verfügt über eine maximale Polyphonie von 64 Noten. Dies bedeutet, daß das Instrument unabhängig von den aktivierten Funktionen maximal 64 Noten gleichzeitig spielen kann. Eine bestimmte Anzahl der verfügbaren Noten wird von der automatischen Begleitung belegt; bei deren Einsatz verringert sich somit die Anzahl der für das Spiel auf der Klaviatur verfügbaren Noten entsprechend. Das Gleiche gilt für Split Voices und Song-Funktion. Wenn die maximale Polyphonie überschritten wird, werden die am frühesten gespielten Noten ausgeschaltet und die zuletzt gespielten Noten haben Vorrang (Last Note Priority). ■ Polyphonie maximale ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Le YDP-V240 dispose d’une polyphonie maximale de 64 notes. Cela signifie que l’instrument peut reproduire un nombre maximal de 64 voix à la fois, indépendamment des fonctions utilisées. L’accompagnement automatique fait appel à un certain nombre de notes disponibles. Il s’ensuit que lorsque l’accompagnement automatique est utilisé, le nombre total de notes disponibles pour l’interprétation au clavier est réduit en conséquence. Cela s’applique aussi aux fonctions Split Voice (Voix partagées) et Song (Morceau). Lorsque la polyphonie maximale est dépassée, les notes jouées en premier ne produisent aucun son ; seules les notes interprétées en dernier sont audibles (priorité à la dernière note). ■ Polifonía máxima ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● El instrumento tiene una polifonía máxima de 64 notas. Esto significa que puede tocar un máximo de 64 notas a la vez, independientemente de las funciones que se usen. El acompañamiento automático utiliza una parte de las notas disponibles, de forma que cuando éste se utiliza el número de notas disponibles se reduce proporcionalmente. Lo mismo puede aplicarse a las funciones Split Voice (Voz de división) y Song (Canción). Si se excede la polifonía máxima, las notas tocadas con anterioridad se cortan y se da prioridad a las notas más recientes (prioridad de la última nota). 126 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program change numbers are often specified as numbers “0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system, in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the transmitted program change numbers to select the appropriate sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program change number 1. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the damper pedal is held. HINWEIS • In der Voice-Liste sind für jede Voice MIDI-Programmwechselnummern enthalten. Verwenden Sie diese Programmwechselnummern, wenn Sie das Instrument über MIDI von einem externen Gerät aus ansteuern. • Die Programmnummern 001 bis 128 hängen direkt mit den MIDI-Programmwechsel-Nummern 000 bis 127 zusammen. Das bedeutet: Programmnummern und Programmwechsel-Nummern unterscheiden sich mit einem Wert von 1. Denken Sie bei diesen Überlegungen daran. • Einige Voices klingen fortwährend, oder klingen sehr lange aus, nachdem die Tasten losgelassen wurden, während das Dämpferpedal gedrückt ist. NOTE • La liste des voix comporte des numéros de changement de programme MIDI pour chaque voix. Utilisez ces derniers pour commander le YDP-V240 à partir d’un périphérique MIDI. • Les numéros de programme 001 à 128 correspondent aux numéros de changement de programme MIDI 000 à 127. Cela signifie que les numéros de programme et les numéros de changement de programme sont décalés de 1. N’oubliez pas de tenir compte de cet écart. • Certaines voix peuvent être entendues en continu ou présenter une longue atténuation une fois que les notes ont été relâchées et tandis que la pédale de maintien est enfoncée. NOTA • La lista de voces incluye números de cambio de programa MIDI para cada voz. Utilice estos números de cambio de programa cuando toque el instrumento a través del MIDI desde un dispositivo externo. • Números de programa de 001 a 128 directamente relacionados con los números de cambio de programa MIDI de 000 a 127. Esto quiere decir que los números de programa y los números de cambio de programa difieren en un valor de 1, elemento que se debe tener en cuenta. • Después de soltar las notas, algunas voces podrían sonar de forma continuada o presentar una larga disminución mientras se mantiene pisado el pedal amortiguador. Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces ● Panel Voice List / Verzeichnis der BedienfeldVoices / Liste des voix de panneau / Lista de voces del panel Voice No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 000 122 001 Natural! Grand 000 113 001 Live! Grand Piano 000 114 001 Live! Warm Grand Piano 000 112 001 Grand Piano 000 112 002 Bright Piano 000 112 007 Harpsichord 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano 000 113 003 CP 80 E.PIANO 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 000 118 005 Cool! Suitcase Electric Piano 000 119 005 Cool! Electric Piano 000 120 005 Phase Electric Piano 000 113 006 Hyper Tines 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano 000 113 005 Tremolo Electric Piano 000 114 008 E.Clavichord 000 112 008 Clavi 000 113 008 WahClavi ORGAN 000 118 019 Cool! Organ 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2 000 112 019 Rock Organ 000 114 019 Purple Organ 000 112 018 Click Organ 000 116 017 Bright Organ 000 127 019 Theater Organ 000 121 020 16'+2' Organ 000 120 020 16'+4' Organ 000 113 020 Chapel Organ 000 112 020 Church Organ 000 112 021 Reed Organ ACCORDION 000 112 022 Musette Accordion 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion 000 113 024 Bandoneon 000 113 023 Modern Harp 000 112 023 Harmonica GUITAR 000 112 025 Classical Guitar 000 112 026 Folk Guitar 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar 000 112 028 Clean Guitar 000 113 027 Octave Guitar 000 112 029 Muted Guitar 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar BASS 000 112 034 Finger Bass 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass 000 112 035 Pick Bass 000 112 036 Fretless Bass 000 112 037 Slap Bass 000 112 039 Synth Bass 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass 000 113 040 Dance Bass Voice No. 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) STRINGS 000 116 050 Live! Orchestra 000 112 049 String Ensemble 000 112 050 Chamber Strings 000 113 050 Slow Strings 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings 000 112 051 Synth Strings 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 112 041 Violin 000 112 043 Cello 000 112 044 Contrabass 000 112 047 Harp 000 112 106 Banjo 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 000 112 053 Choir 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble 000 112 055 Air Choir 000 112 054 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax 000 114 072 Sweet! Clarinet 000 118 067 Growl Sax 000 112 067 Tenor Sax 000 112 066 Alto Sax 000 112 065 Soprano Sax 000 112 068 Baritone Sax 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 112 072 Clarinet 000 112 069 Oboe 000 112 070 English Horn 000 112 071 Bassoon TRUMPET 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet 000 117 058 Sweet! Trombone 000 114 060 Sweet! Muted Trumpet 000 112 057 Trumpet 000 112 058 Trombone 000 113 058 Trombone Section 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet 000 112 061 French Horn 000 112 059 Tuba BRASS 000 112 062 Brass Section 000 113 062 Big Band Brass 000 113 063 80’s Brass 000 119 062 Mellow Horns 000 114 063 Techno Brass 000 112 063 Synth Brass FLUTE 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute 000 112 074 Flute 000 112 073 Piccolo 000 112 076 Pan Flute 000 112 075 Recorder 000 112 080 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 000 112 081 Square Lead 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead 000 115 082 Analogon 000 119 082 Fargo 000 112 099 Star Dust 000 112 086 Voice Lead 000 112 101 Brightness Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 127 Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces Voice No. 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) SYNTH PAD 000 118 089 SweetHeaven 000 112 092 Xenon Pad 000 112 095 Equinox 000 112 089 Fantasia 000 113 090 Dark Moon 000 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 000 112 012 Vibraphone 000 112 013 Marimba 000 112 014 Xylophone 000 112 115 Steel Drums 000 112 009 Celesta 000 112 011 Music Box 000 112 015 Tubular Bells 000 112 048 Timpani DRUM KITS 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2 127 000 009 Room Kit 127 000 017 Rock Kit 127 000 025 Electronic Kit 127 000 026 Analog Kit 127 000 113 Dance Kit 127 000 033 Jazz Kit 127 000 041 Brush Kit 127 000 049 Symphony Kit 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2 ● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List / Liste der XGlite-Voices/optionale XGlite-Voices* / Voix XGlite/liste des voix* XGlite en option / Lista de voces de XGlite/voces opcionales de XGlite* Voice No. 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 *159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 128 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG PIANO 000 000 001 Grand Piano 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP 000 040 001 Piano Strings 000 041 001 Dream 000 000 002 Bright Piano 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP 000 032 003 Detuned CP80 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano 000 000 007 Harpsichord 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2 000 000 008 Clavi 000 001 008 Clavi KSP XG CHROMATIC 000 000 009 Celesta 000 000 010 Glockenspiel 000 000 011 Music Box 000 064 011 Orgel 000 000 012 Vibraphone 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP 000 000 013 Marimba 000 001 013 Marimba KSP 000 064 013 Sine Marimba 000 097 013 Balimba 000 098 013 Log Drums 000 000 014 Xylophone 000 000 015 Tubular Bells 000 096 015 Church Bells 000 097 015 Carillon 000 000 016 Dulcimer 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2 000 096 016 Cimbalom 000 097 016 Santur XG ORGAN 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 000 040 017 16+2'2/3 000 064 017 Organ Bass 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2 000 000 018 Percussive Organ 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ 000 033 018 Light Organ 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2 000 000 019 Rock Organ Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces Voice No. 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 064 019 Rotary Organ 000 065 019 Slow Rotary 000 066 019 Fast Rotary 000 000 020 Church Organ 000 032 020 Church Organ 3 000 035 020 Church Organ 2 000 040 020 Notre Dame 000 064 020 Organ Flute 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute 000 000 021 Reed Organ 000 040 021 Puff Organ 000 000 022 Accordion 000 000 023 Harmonica 000 032 023 Harmonica 2 000 000 024 Tango Accordion 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 000 096 025 Ukulele 000 000 026 Steel Guitar 000 035 026 12-string Guitar 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 000 096 026 Mandolin 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar 000 032 027 Jazz Amp 000 000 028 Clean Guitar 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar 000 000 029 Muted Guitar 000 040 029 Funk Guitar 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar 000 045 029 Jazz Man 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2 XG BASS 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 000 000 034 Finger Bass 000 018 034 Finger Dark 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2 000 065 034 Modulated Bass 000 000 035 Pick Bass 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass 000 000 036 Fretless Bass 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass Voice No. *268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass 000 041 040 DX Bass XG STRINGS 000 000 041 Violin 000 008 041 Slow Violin 000 000 042 Viola 000 000 043 Cello 000 000 044 Contrabass 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings 000 040 045 Suspense Strings 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp 000 040 047 Yang Chin 000 000 048 Timpani XG ENSEMBLE 000 000 049 Strings 1 000 003 049 Stereo Strings 000 008 049 Slow Strings 000 035 049 60’s Strings 000 040 049 Orchestra 000 041 049 Orchestra 2 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra 000 045 049 Velocity Strings 000 000 050 Strings 2 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings 000 008 050 Legato Strings 000 040 050 Warm Strings 000 041 050 Kingdom 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2 000 000 053 Choir Aahs 000 003 053 Stereo Choir 000 032 053 Mellow Choir 000 040 053 Choir Strings 000 000 054 Voice Oohs 000 000 055 Synth Voice 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2 000 041 055 Choral 000 064 055 Analog Voice 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2 000 064 056 Impact XG BRASS 000 000 057 Trumpet 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet 000 000 058 Trombone 000 018 058 Trombone 2 000 000 059 Tuba 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet 000 000 061 French Horn 000 006 061 French Horn Solo 000 032 061 French Horn 2 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra 000 000 062 Brass Section 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2 000 018 064 Soft Brass 000 041 064 Choir Brass XG REED 000 000 065 Soprano Sax 000 000 066 Alto Sax 000 040 066 Sax Section 000 000 067 Tenor Sax Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 129 Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces Voice No. 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 130 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 000 068 Baritone Sax 000 000 069 Oboe 000 000 070 English Horn 000 000 071 Bassoon 000 000 072 Clarinet XG PIPE 000 000 073 Piccolo 000 000 074 Flute 000 000 075 Recorder 000 000 076 Pan Flute 000 000 077 Blown Bottle 000 000 078 Shakuhachi 000 000 079 Whistle 000 000 080 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 000 000 081 Square Lead 000 006 081 Square Lead 2 000 008 081 LM Square 000 018 081 Hollow 000 019 081 Shroud 000 064 081 Mellow 000 065 081 Solo Sine 000 066 081 Sine Lead 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth 000 020 082 Big Lead 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog 000 000 083 Calliope Lead 000 065 083 Pure Lead 000 000 084 Chiff Lead 000 000 085 Charang Lead 000 064 085 Distorted Lead 000 000 086 Voice Lead 000 000 087 Fifths Lead 000 035 087 Big Five 000 000 088 Bass & Lead 000 016 088 Big & Low 000 064 088 Fat & Perky 000 065 088 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 000 000 089 New Age Pad 000 064 089 Fantasy 000 000 090 Warm Pad 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad 000 000 092 Choir Pad 000 066 092 Itopia 000 000 093 Bowed Pad 000 000 094 Metallic Pad 000 000 095 Halo Pad 000 000 096 Sweep Pad XG SYNTH EFFECTS 000 000 097 Rain 000 065 097 African Wind 000 066 097 Carib 000 000 098 Sound Track 000 027 098 Prologue 000 000 099 Crystal 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp 000 014 099 Popcorn 000 018 099 Tiny Bells 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes 000 041 099 Clear Bells Voice No. 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 042 099 Chorus Bells 000 065 099 Soft Crystal 000 070 099 Air Bells 000 071 099 Bell Harp 000 072 099 Gamelimba 000 000 100 Atmosphere 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere 000 019 100 Hollow Release 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano 000 064 100 Nylon Harp 000 065 100 Harp Vox 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad 000 000 101 Brightness 000 000 102 Goblins 000 064 102 Goblins Synth 000 065 102 Creeper 000 067 102 Ritual 000 068 102 To Heaven 000 070 102 Night 000 071 102 Glisten 000 096 102 Bell Choir 000 000 103 Echoes 000 000 104 Sci-Fi XG WORLD 000 000 105 Sitar 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar 000 035 105 Sitar 2 000 097 105 Tamboura 000 000 106 Banjo 000 028 106 Muted Banjo 000 096 106 Rabab 000 097 106 Gopichant 000 098 106 Oud 000 000 107 Shamisen 000 000 108 Koto 000 096 108 Taisho-kin 000 097 108 Kanoon 000 000 109 Kalimba 000 000 110 Bagpipe 000 000 111 Fiddle 000 000 112 Shanai XG PERCUSSIVE 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell 000 096 113 Bonang 000 097 113 Altair 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal 000 000 114 Agogo 000 000 115 Steel Drums 000 097 115 Glass Percussion 000 098 115 Thai Bells 000 000 116 Woodblock 000 096 116 Castanets 000 000 117 Taiko Drum 000 096 117 Gran Cassa 000 000 118 Melodic Tom 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2 000 065 118 Real Tom 000 066 118 Rock Tom 000 000 119 Synth Drum 000 064 119 Analog Tom 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 000 000 121 Fret Noise 000 000 122 Breath Noise Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces Voice No. 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 000 123 000 000 124 000 000 125 000 000 126 000 000 127 000 000 128 064 000 001 064 000 002 064 000 004 064 000 017 064 000 033 064 000 034 064 000 035 064 000 036 064 000 037 064 000 038 064 000 049 064 000 050 064 000 051 064 000 056 064 000 065 064 000 066 064 000 067 064 000 068 064 000 069 064 000 070 064 000 071 064 000 081 064 000 082 064 000 083 064 000 084 064 000 085 064 000 086 064 000 087 064 000 088 064 000 089 064 000 090 064 000 091 064 000 097 064 000 098 064 000 099 064 000 100 064 000 101 064 000 113 064 000 114 064 000 115 064 000 116 Voice Name Seashore Bird Tweet Telephone Ring Helicopter Applause Gunshot Cutting Noise Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Flute Key Click Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Maou Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Split Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. Voice-Nummern mit einem Stern (*) sind optionale Xglite-Voices. Le numéro de voix porteur d’un astérisque (*) est une voix XGlite en option. El número de voz con un asterisco (*) es una voz opcional de XGlite. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 131 Drum Kit List Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “132: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C#0 D0 E0 F0 D#0 F#0 G0 G#0 A0 B0 C1 A#0 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 C#6 D6 E6 F6 G6 D#6 F#6 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 132 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 • „ “ bedeutet, dass der Schlagzeugklang gleich „Standard Kit 1“ ist. • Jede Perkussionsnote belegt eine Note. • Die MIDI-Note # und Note sind in Wirklichkeit eine Octave tiefer als hier aufgeführt. Beispiel: In „132: Standard Kit 1“ entspricht die „Seq Click H“ (Note# 36/Note C1) der Note (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Mit „O“ bezeichnete Tasten hören sofort auf zu klingen, sobald sie losgelassen werden. • Stimmen mit derselben Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) können nicht gleichzeitig gespielt werden. (Diese Stimmen sind dazu gedacht, wechselweise gespielt zu werden.) 132 127/000/001 133 127/000/002 134 127/000/009 135 127/000/017 136 127/000/025 137 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll 2 Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy Open Rim Shot H Short Kick Tight Short Kick Short Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Snappy Electro Snare Noisy 4 Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2 Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Short Kick Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Analog Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Tom Room 1 Snare Rock Rim Tom Rock 1 Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 percussion / Lista de juegos de batería • « » indique que les sonorités de percussion sont identiques à celles de « Standard Kit 1 ». • Chaque voix de percussion utilise une note unique. • Le numéro de note MIDI (Note #) et la note MIDI se situent en réalité à une octave inférieure à celle qui est indiquée dans la liste. Par exemple, dans « 132 : Standard Kit 1 », « Seq Click H » (Note# 36/Note C1) correspond à (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off : pour les touches signalées par « O », l’émission de sons s’arrête instantanément aussitôt que les touches sont relâchées. • Les voix portant un même numéro de note alternative (*1 ... 4) ne peuvent pas être jouées simultanément. (Elles sont en effet conçues pour être interprétées en alternance). Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C#0 D0 E0 F0 D#0 F#0 G0 G#0 A0 B0 C1 A#0 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 C#6 D6 E6 F6 G6 D#6 F#6 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 • “ ” indica que el sonido de batería es el mismo que el “Standard Kit 1”. • Cada sonido de percusión utiliza una nota. • La nota MIDI # y la nota son en realidad una octava menos de lo que aparece en la lista. Por ejemplo, en “132: Standard Kit 1”, el “Seq Click H” (Nota# 36/Nota C1) corresponde a (Nota# 24/Nota C0). • Tecla desactivada: las teclas marcadas con “O” dejan de sonar en el momento en que se sueltan. • Los sonidos con el mismo número alterno de nota (*1 ... 4) no pueden tocarse simultáneamente. (Están diseñados para tocarse alternativamente el uno con el otro.) 132 127/000/001 138 127/000/113 139 127/000/033 140 127/000/041 141 127/000/049 142 126/000/001 143 126/000/002 Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Analog Snare Clap Snare Dry Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog3 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Kick Soft 2 Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Kick Jazz Kick Small Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Jazz M Tom Jazz 1 Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5 Hand Cymbal Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6 Hand Cymbal Short Tom Jazz 6 Cutting Noise Phone Call Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Door Slam String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Hand Cymbal 2 Train Jet Plane Hand Cymbal 2 Short Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Maou Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 133 Style List Style List / Style-Liste / Liste des styles / Lista de estilos Style No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 134 Style Name 8BEAT ChartPianoPop BritPopRock 8BeatModern Cool8Beat Classic8Beat 60’sGuitarPop 8BeatAdria 60’s8Beat BubblegumPop BritPopSwing OffBeat 60’sRock HardRock RockShuffle 8BeatRock 16BEAT 16Beat PianoPopShufle PopShuffle1 PopShuffle2 GuitarPop 16BeatUptempo KoolShuffle JazzRock HipHopLight BALLAD ChartPianoBld PopGtrBallad 80’sBallad PianoBallad LoveSong 6-8ModernEP 6-8SlowRock 6-8OrchBallad OrganBallad PopBallad 16BeatBallad1 16BeatBallad2 DANCE ClubBeat Electronica FunkyHouse MellowHipHop EuroTrance Ibiza DreamDance TechnoPolis Clubdance ClubLatin Garage UKPop HipHopGroove HipShuffle HipHopPop DISCO 70’sDisco1 70’sDisco2 LatinDisco DiscoPhilly Style No. 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Style Name SaturdayNight DiscoChocolate DiscoHands SWING&JAZZ TradJazzPiano1 TradJazzPiano2 PianoBarBlues BigBandFast BigBandMedium BigBandBallad BigBandShuffle JazzClub Swing1 Swing2 OrchestraSwing Five-Four JazzBallad Dixieland Ragtime AfroCuban Charleston R&B Soul DetroitPop1 60’sRock&Roll 6-8Soul CrocoTwist Rock&Roll DetroitPop2 BoogieWoogie ComboBoogie 6-8Blues COUNTRY 70’sCountry Country8Beat CountryPop CountrySwing CountryBallad Country2-4 CowboyBoogie CountryShuffle Bluegrass LATIN BrazilianSamba BossaNova PopBossa Tijuana DiscoLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GuitarRumba RumbaFlamenco RumbaIsland Reggae BALLROOM VienneseWaltz EnglishWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Style No. 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 Style Name Quickstep Tango Pasodoble Samba ChaChaCha Rumba Jive TRADITIONAL USMarch 6-8March GermanMarch PolkaPop OberPolka Tarantella Showtune ChristmasSwing ChristmasWaltz ScottishReel Hawaiian WALTZ ItalianWaltz MariachiWaltz GuitarSerenade SwingWaltz JazzWaltz1 JazzWaltz2 CountryWaltz OberWaltzer Musette CHILDREN Learning2-4 Learning4-4 Learning6-8 Fun 3-4 Fun 4-4 PIANIST Stride PianoBlues1 PianoBlues2 PianoRag PianoRock&Roll PianoBoogie PianoJazzWaltz PianoJazzBld Arpeggio Musical Habanera SlowRock 8BtPianoBallad PianoMarch 6-8PianoMarch PianoWaltz PianoBeguine PianoSwing Music Database List Music Database List / Musikdatenbankliste / Liste des bases de données musicales / Lista de la base de datos musical MDB No. MDB Name ALL TIME HITS 1 Jude Hey 2 New UK 3 MyLoving 4 All OK 5 Buttercp 6 JustCall 7 CheepChp 8 Daddy's 9 Dance? 10 GetBack 11 GtrWheel 12 HighTide 13 IWasBorn 14 Sailing 15 BluJeans 16 Holiday 17 Imagine 18 LoveMe 19 LetItBld 20 LdyMdona 21 YelowSub 22 Marriage 23 MovinOut 24 My Shell 25 NowNever 26 DoLoveMe 27 TcktRide 28 SeeClear 29 Masachus 30 Hard Day 31 USA Pie 32 Norway 33 YesterBd MODERN POP 34 Watches 35 SoundMPH 36 Hold Us 37 Unfound 38 NeedSome 39 PrtTmLvr 40 MoonShdw 41 NikitSng 42 Sure of 43 Off Day 44 Tell Her 45 GirlsMne 46 NeedLove POP CLASSICS 47 Standing 48 RainLaff 49 Sunshine 50 ForNamdo 51 ThankFor 52 ManPiano 53 CoinLane 54 LovesYou 55 Tmbourin 56 Alone 57 GldField 58 Raindrop 59 SultanSw 60 Life'sWk 61 TopWorld MDB No. MDB Name 62 WatchGrl POP BALLAD 63 WnderLnd 64 CanIStop 65 EvryTime 66 IvoryAnd 67 TheWorld 68 LovWoman 69 Dolannes 70 Madigan 71 Paradise 72 Whisper BALLAD 73 AllOdds 74 AtonalFl 75 Hero 76 Woman 77 RunToYou 78 LoveOfAl 79 CndleWnd 80 Cavatina 81 Cherish 82 ToLoveMe 83 YouKnow 84 Evrythng 85 EyesOfBl 86 Hello 87 BeThere 88 FlyAway 89 LoveYou 90 NeverLet 91 JustOnce 92 IfYouGo 93 SavingAl 94 InTheDrk 95 LovePwr 96 Vision 97 Beautifl 98 AllAlone 99 Opposite 100 BeHonest 101 SayYou 102 SayNthng 103 Stranger 104 OneDay 105 TheBayou 106 ThisSong 107 Distance 108 ThisWay 109 LoveGone 110 Inspirng 111 TrueColr ROCK & ROLL 112 ShakenUp 113 Beethovn 114 HurryLov 115 BeCruel 116 Jumping 117 Countdwn 118 SuePeggy 119 Champion 120 Jailhous 121 BlueShoe 122 Rockin24 MDB No. MDB Name 123 Shouting 124 Rock&Rll 125 HonkyTnk OLDIES 126 Daydream 127 Sumertme 128 Diana's 129 Uptown 130 Apache 131 IGotIt 132 Tonight 133 MyPillow 134 NoRain 135 FinalDance 136 SlpnLion 137 Ghetto 138 LipsLcky 139 PrettyWm 140 TikiGtr 141 TurnThre 142 Sherry DANCE & DISCO 143 Babylon 144 Goodbye 145 Catch22 146 DISCO 147 Survival 148 TheNavy 149 DontHide 150 Celebrat 151 LondonRU 152 10,2 Sun 153 ShakeYou 154 Believe 155 BoySumer 156 I'mSexy 157 StuffHot SWING & JAZZ 158 Patrol 159 Charles 160 GiveLove 161 Rhythm 162 LOVE 163 LeroyBad 164 Caraban 165 Misbehav 166 Safari 167 Smiling 168 SoWhatIs 169 TimeGone 170 TasteHny 171 Sandman 172 Tunisian 173 TwoFoot 174 MyBaby R&B 175 AsPlayed 176 BabyGrov 177 Highwy66 178 SweetCHI 179 JustU&Me 180 ManLoves 181 OurLove 182 Wish I MDB No. MDB Name COUNTRY 183 OnTheRd 184 Breathe 185 InMyMind 186 ContryHw 187 GreenGrs 188 EverNeed 189 Lonesome 190 Lucille 191 HomeRng 192 Tennesse LATIN 193 Bananabt 194 DanceMng 195 DntWorry 196 Jamaica 197 FleaSpa 198 I'mPola 199 MamboJm 200 OneNote 201 PasoCani 202 SayNoMor 203 Beguine 204 Tijuana 205 Picture ENTERTAINMENT 206 OnTheHil 207 Barnacle 208 Califrag 209 DadClock 210 DanceLd 211 DnceFire 212 BigCntry 213 Cabaret 214 OdeToJoy 215 Mi-Re-Do 216 MyPrince 217 Necesary 218 NoBuiz 219 NoisyOld 220 Sleigh 221 RockBaby 222 Magnifiq 223 Magnfcnt 224 SilentNt 225 Nabucco 226 Standing 227 SummerPl 228 Christms 229 Favorite 230 Tubbie 231 Turkish 232 12OClock WALTZ & TRADITIONAL 233 Blk&Whte 234 CanCan 235 Charmain 236 Musicbox 237 Clementn 238 Doodah! 239 Dreamer 240 EnterRag 241 Birthday 242 MaryLamb MDB No. MDB Name 243 Donald's 244 MoonWlz 245 MoulinHt 246 Sunshine 247 PieceOf 248 GreenSlv 249 TakeFour 250 TexRose 251 ThePolka 252 Scarboro 253 Edelweis 254 AroundWd 255 Whatever 256 Yankee's WORLD 257 Hawaii 258 D'amor 259 ElCondor 260 GoodbyRm 261 ILandOn 262 ItalyBel 263 Cucarumb 264 Puntuali 265 Cielito 266 ItalySun 267 SantaLuc 268 Trumpetr 269 VanMass PIANIST 270 ItalySun 271 BeGood 272 Chaie's 273 Flower 274 Frenetic 275 Highwy66 276 Leaves 277 Miload 278 Cabaret 279 Wonderfl 280 Submarin 281 Mi-Re-Do 282 MoreRhum 283 NoBuiz 284 BeatifulSn 285 OhBlah 286 Charades 287 Sally's 288 Nabucco 289 Spanish 290 SunnyStr 291 MistyFln 292 LdnBridg 293 GrndClck 294 Importnc 295 Snowman 296 Favorite 297 SugerSpn 298 Washngtn 299 ThisWay 300 ZipperD Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 135 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM / Songs auf der beiliegenden CD-ROM / Morceaux disponibles sur le CD-ROM fourni / Canciones incluidas en el CD-ROM proporcionado File Name 001Nutcr.mid 002Orphe.mid 003Slavo.mid 004Prima.mid 005Medit.mid 006Guill.mid 007Fruhl.mid 008Ungar.mid 009Fruhl.mid 010Dolly.mid 011Cande.mid 012Arabe.mid 013Pasto.mid 014Petit.mid 015Innoc.mid 016Progr.mid 017Taren.mid 018Cheva.mid 019Etude.mid 020Marci.mid 021Turki.mid 022Valse.mid 023Menue.mid 024Momen.mid 025Enter.mid 026Prelu.mid 027Violl.mid 028Angel.mid 029Saraf.mid 030Ameri.mid 031Brown.mid 032Lomon.mid 033Bonni.mid 034Londo.mid 035Banjo.mid 036Vogle.mid 037Lorel.mid 038Funic.mid 039Turke.mid 040Campt.mid 041Jingl.mid 042Muss.mid 043Liebe.mid 044Jesu.mid 045Joy.mid 046Pearl.mid 047Gavot.mid 048Seren.mid 049Menue.mid 050Canon.mid 051Vogel.mid 052Piano.mid 053Surpr.mid 054WildR.mid 055Chans.mid 056Babbi.mid 057RowRo.mid 058Smoky.mid 059WeWis.mid 060ImMai.mid 061Chris.mid 062MaryH.mid 063TenLi.mid 064PopGo.mid 065Twink.mid 066Close.mid 067Cucko.mid 068Augus.mid 069Londo.mid 070Three.mid Song Name Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture Slavonic Dances op.72-2 La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) Méditation (Thaïs) Guillaume Tell Frühlingslied Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 Frühlingsstimmen Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening La Candeur Arabesque Pastorale Petite Réunion Innocence Progrès Tarentelle La Chevaleresque Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” Marcia alla Turca Turkish March Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” Menuett Moments Musicaux op.94-3 The Entertainer Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) La Viollette Angels Serenade Krasnyj Sarafan America the Beautiful Little Brown Jug Loch Lomond My Bonnie Londonderry Air Ring de Banjo Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Die Lorelei Funiculi Funicula Turkey in the Straw Camptown Races Jingle Bells Muss i denn Liebesträume Nr.3 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring Ode to Joy Pearl Fisher Gavotte Serenade/Haydn Menuett BWV. Anh.114 Canon in D Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die Zauberflöte” Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 To a Wild Rose Chanson du Toreador O Mio Babbino Caro Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Im Mai (DUET) O Christmas Tree (DUET) Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Ten Little Indians (DUET) Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) The Cuckoo (DUET) O du lieber Augustin (DUET) London Bridge (DUET) Three Blind Mice (DUET) Composer P.I. Tchaikovsky J. Offenbach ˇ A. Dvorák A. Vivaldi J. Massenet G. Rossini F. Mendelssohn J. Brahms J. Strauss II T.Oesten J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller F.Chopin L.v. Beethoven W.A. Mozart F.Chopin L. Boccherini F. Schubert S. Joplin J.S. Bach L.Streabbog Traditional Traditional S.A. Ward Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S.C. Foster Traditional F. Silcher L. Denza Traditional S.C. Foster J.S. Pierpont F. Silcher F. Liszt J.S. Bach L.v. Beethoven G. Bizet F.J. Gossec F.J. Haydn J.S. Bach J. Pachelbel W.A. Mozart L.v. Beethoven F.J. Haydn E.A. MacDowell G. Bizet G. Puccini Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S. Winner Traditional Traditional J.J. Rousseau Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data. Easy Song Arranger kann nur zusammen mit Songs verwendet werden, die Akkorddaten enthalten. La fonction Easy Song Arranger ne s’utilise qu’avec des morceaux comportant des données d’accord. La función Easy Song Arranger (arreglos sencillos de canciones) sólo puede utilizarse con canciones que incluyan datos de acordes. 136 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Harmony Type List Harmony Type List / Liste der Harmony-Typen / Liste des types d’harmonie / Lista de tipos de armonías No. Harmony Type 1 01(Standard Duet) 2 02(Standard Trio) 3 03(Full Chord) 4 04(Rock Duet) 5 05(Country Duet) 6 06(Country Trio) 7 07(Block) 8 08(4-Way Close 1) 9 09(4-Way Close 2) 10 10(4-Way Open) 11 11(1+5) 12 12(Octave) 13 13(Strum) 14 14(Multi Assign) 15 15(Echo 1/4) 16 16(Echo 1/6) 17 17(Echo 1/8) 18 18(Echo 1/12) 19 19(Tremolo 1/8) 20 20(Tremolo 1/12) 21 21(Tremolo 1/16) 22 22(Tremolo 1/32) 23 23(Trill 1/12) 24 24(Trill 1/16) 25 25(Trill 1/24) 26 26(Trill 1/32) Description Harmony types 01–10, 13 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing songs that contain chord data. Die Harmony-Typen 01 bis 10, 13 sind Tonhöheneffekte und bereichern eine monophon im rechten Tastaturbereich gespielte Melodie um ein-, zwei- oder dreistimmige Harmonien. Diese Typen werden nur erzeugt, wenn Akkorde im Tastaturbereich für die Begleitung gespielt werden. Les types d’effets Harmony 01–10, 13 sont des effets basés sur la hauteur et ajoutent des harmonies à une, deux ou trois notes à la mélodie à une seule note jouée de la main droite. Ces effets ne sont audibles que lorsque des accords sont joués dans la section d’accompagnement automatique du clavier. Los tipos de armonía 01–10, 13 se basan en el tono y añaden armonías de una, dos o tres notas a la melodía de una sola nota tocada en la parte de la mano derecha. Estos tipos sólo suenan cuando se tocan acordes en la sección del acompañamiento automático del teclado. Types 15–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 34). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets. • The Echo effect Types (15–18) create delayed repeats of each note played. • The Tremolo effect Types (19–22) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Trill effect Types (23–26) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. Die Harmony-Typen 15 bis 26 sind Rhythmuseffekte und erzeugen im Takt zur Begleitautomatik Verzierungen oder verzögerte Wiederholungen. Der jeweilige Harmony-Effekt wird sowohl bei eingeschalteter als auch bei ausgeschalteter automatischer Bass/Akkord-Begleitung erzeugt; die Effektgeschwindigkeit hängt jedoch stets von der aktuellen Tempoeinstellung ab (Seite 34). Dank der spezifischen Notenwerte der einzelnen Harmony-Typen können Sie den Effekt präzise mit dem Rhythmus synchronisieren. Es gibt auch Triolen-Einstellungen: 1/6 = Viertelnotentriolen, 1/12 = Achtelnotentriolen, 1/24 = Sechzehntelnotentriolen. • Die Echo-Effekttypen (15 bis 18) erzeugen verzögerte Wiederholungen jeder gespielten Note. • Mit den Tremolo-Effekttypen (19 bis 22) werden alle gehaltenen Noten (maximal vier Töne) wiederholt. • Die Triller-Effekttypen (23 bis 26) erzeugen Triller (zwei Töne in schnellem Wechsel), wenn zwei Tasten gehalten werden. Les types 15–26 sont des effets reposant sur le rythme qui ajoutent des embellissements ou des répétitions retardées synchronisées avec l’accompagnement automatique. Ces types d’effets sont audibles que l’accompagnement automatique soit activé ou non. Cependant, la vitesse réelle de l’effet dépend du réglage du tempo (page 34). La valeur individuelle des notes pour chaque type vous permet de synchroniser avec précision l’effet sur le rythme. Des réglages de triolet sont également disponibles : 1/6 = triolets de noires, 1/12 = triolets de croches, 1/ 24 = triolets de doubles croches. • Les types d’effets Echo (15–18) créent des répétitions retardées de chaque note jouée. • Les types d’effets Tremolo (19–22) répètent toutes les notes maintenues (jusqu’à quatre notes). • Les types d’effet Trill (23–26) créent des trilles à deux notes (notes alternées) lorsque deux notes sont maintenues enfoncées. Los tipos 15 a 26 son efectos basados en el ritmo y añaden embellecimientos o repeticiones retardadas en sincronización con el acompañamiento automático. Estos tipos suenan tanto si el acompañamiento automático está activado como si no; sin embargo, la velocidad real del efecto depende del ajuste de tempo (página 34). Los valores de las notas individuales en cada tipo le permiten sincronizar el efecto y el ritmo con una gran precisión. También hay disponibles ajustes de tresillos: 1/6 = tresillos de notas negras, 1/12 = tresillos de corcheas, 1/24 = tresillos de semicorcheas. • Los tipos de efectos de eco (15 a 18) crean repeticiones retardadas de cada nota tocada. • Los tipos de efectos de trémolo (19 a 22) repiten todas las notas que se mantienen pulsadas (hasta cuatro). • Los tipos de efectos de trino (23 a 26) crean trinos de dos notas (notas alternadas) cuando se mantienen pulsadas dos teclas. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 137 Effect Type List Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types ● Reverb Types / Reverb-Typen / Types d’effets Reverb / Tipos de reverberación No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 138 Type HALL1 HALL2 HALL3 HALL4 HALL5 HALL M HALL L BASIC HALL LARGE HALL ATMO HALL ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 ROOM4 ROOM5 ROOM6 ROOM7 ROOM S ROOM M ROOM L ACOSTIC ROOM DRUMS ROOM PERC ROOM STAGE1 STAGE2 STAGE3 STAGE4 PLATE1 PLATE2 PLATE3 GM PLATE TUNNEL CANYON BASEMENT WHITE ROOM NO EFFECT Description Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall. Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. Reverb suitable for a solo instrument. Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit. Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. No effect. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones MSB 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 17 18 19 16 0 LSB 0 16 17 18 1 6 7 30 31 23 16 17 18 19 0 1 2 5 6 7 20 21 22 16 17 0 1 16 17 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos ● Chorus Types / Chorus-Typen / Types d’effets Chorus / Tipos de coro No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Type CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4 CHORUS5 CHORUS6 CHORUS7 CHORUS8 CHORUS FAST CHORUS LITE GM CHORUS1 GM CHORUS2 GM CHORUS3 GM CHORUS4 FB CHORUS CELESTE1 CELESTE2 SYMPHONIC1 SYMPHONIC2 FLANGER1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 FLANGER4 FLANGER5 GM FLANGER ROTARY SP1 ROTARY SP2 ROTARY SP3 ROTARY SP4 ROTARY SP5 ROTARY SP6 ROTARY SP7 2WAY ROT SP AUTO PAN1 AUTO PAN2 EP AUTOPAN T_AUTO PAN1 TREMOLO1 TREMOLO2 TREMOLO3 EP TREMOLO GT TREMOLO1 GT TREMOLO2 T_TREMOLO NO EFFECT Description Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste. Adds a sweeping effect to the sound. Simulates a rotary speaker. Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back). Tempo synchronized Auto PAN. Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation. No effect. MSB 66 66 66 66 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 68 68 67 67 67 67 67 67 69 71 71 70 66 69 71 86 71 71 71 121 70 71 70 70 71 70 120 0 LSB 17 8 16 1 2 0 1 8 16 17 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 16 0 8 16 17 1 0 7 16 17 18 17 18 0 22 0 16 0 21 0 16 19 0 18 20 19 0 0 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 139 Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos ● DSP Types / DSP Typen / Types de DSP / Tipos de DSP No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Type HALL1 HALL2 HALL3 HALL4 HALL5 HALL M HALL L BASIC HALL LARGE HALL ATMO HALL ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 ROOM4 ROOM5 ROOM6 ROOM7 ROOM S ROOM M ROOM L ACOSTIC ROOM DRUMS ROOM PERC ROOM STAGE1 STAGE2 STAGE3 STAGE4 PLATE1 PLATE2 PLATE3 GM PLATE TUNNEL CANYON BASEMENT WHITE ROOM CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4 CHORUS5 CHORUS6 CHORUS7 CHORUS8 CHORUS FAST CHORUS LITE GM CHORUS1 GM CHORUS2 GM CHORUS3 GM CHORUS4 FB CHORUS CELESTE1 CELESTE2 SYMPHONIC1 SYMPHONIC2 ENS DETUNE1 ENS DETUNE2 KARAOKE1 KARAOKE2 KARAOKE3 ER1 ER2 GATE REVERB REVERS GATE 64 EQ DISCO 65 EQ TEL 66 2BAND EQ 140 Description Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall. Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. Reverb suitable for a solo instrument. Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit. Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste. Chorus effect without modulation, created by adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound. Echo for karaoke. This effect isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb. Simulation of gated reverb. Simulation of gated reverb played back in reverse. Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in most disco music. Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound heard through a telephone receiver. Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones MSB 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 17 18 19 16 66 66 66 66 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 68 68 87 87 20 20 20 9 9 10 11 LSB 0 16 17 18 1 6 7 30 31 23 16 17 18 19 0 1 2 5 6 7 20 21 22 16 17 0 1 16 17 0 7 0 0 0 0 17 8 16 1 2 0 1 8 16 17 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 16 0 0 16 0 1 2 0 1 0 0 76 16 76 17 77 0 Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos No. 67 Type 3BAND EQ 68 ST 3BAND EQ 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 HM ENHANCE1 HM ENHANCE2 FLANGER1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 FLANGER4 FLANGER5 GM FLANGER V_FLANGER TEMPO FLANGER DELAY LCR1 DELAY LCR2 DELAY LR ECHO CROSS DELAY TEMPO DELAY TEMPO ECHO TEMPO CROSS V_DST ROCA V_DST FUSION V_DST CRUNC V_DST VINTAG V_DST HARD2 V_DST HEAVY V_DST HARD1 V_DST SOFT DIST HARD1 DIST HARD2 DIST SOFT1 DIST SOFT2 DIST HEAVY OVERDRIVE1 OVERDRIVE2 ST DIST ST OD ST DIST HARD ST DIST SOFT AMP SIM1 AMP SIM2 ST AMP1 ST AMP2 ST AMP3 ST AMP4 ST AMP5 ST AMP6 DST+DELAY1 DST+DELAY2 OD+DELAY1 OD+DELAY2 CMP+DST+DLY1 CMP+DST+DLY2 CMP+OD+DLY1 CMP+OD+DLY2 V_DST H+DLY V_DST S+DLY DST+TDLY OD+TDLY COMP+DIST1 COMP+DIST2 CMP+DST+TDLY CMP+OD+TDLY1 CMP+OD+TDLY2 CMP+OD+TDLY3 CMP+OD+TDLY4 CMP+OD+TDLY5 CMP+OD+TDLY6 Description Mono EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range frequencies. Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range frequencies. Adds new harmonics to the input signal to make the sound stand out. Adds a sweeping effect to the sound. Flanger which simulates vintage tube and fuzz sounds. Tempo synchronized flanger. Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and C (center). Produces two delayed sounds: L and R. Two feedback delays are provided. Two delayed sounds (L and R), and independent feedback delays for L and R. The feedback of the two delayed sounds is crossed. Tempo synchronized delay. Tempo synchronized delay. Tempo synchronized L&R delay. Vintage Distortion. Hard-edge distortion. Soft, warm distortion. Heavy distortion. Adds mild distortion to the sound. Stereo distortion. Stereo Overdrive. Hard-edge stereo distortion. Soft, warm soft distortion. A simulation of a guitar amp. Stereo amp simulator. Distortion and Delay are connected in series. Overdrive and Delay are connected in series. Compressor, Distortion and Delay are connected in series. Compressor, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series. V Distortion and Delay are connected in series. Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Compressor and Distotion are connected in series. Compressor, Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. MSB LSB 76 0 76 18 81 81 67 67 67 67 67 67 104 107 5 5 6 7 8 21 21 22 103 103 98 98 98 98 98 98 75 75 75 75 73 74 74 73 74 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 95 95 95 95 96 96 96 96 98 98 100 100 73 73 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 16 0 8 16 17 1 0 7 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 18 19 28 29 30 31 0 2 16 22 17 23 0 0 9 8 8 18 19 0 1 20 21 8 24 25 26 16 0 17 1 16 0 17 1 1 3 0 1 16 1 0 1 16 17 18 19 20 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 141 Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos No. 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 Type V_DST H+TDL1 V_DST H+TDL2 V_DST S+TDL1 V_DST S+TDL2 COMP MED COMP HEAVY COMP MELODY COMP BASS MBAND COMP 144 COMPRESSOR 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 NOISE GATE VCE CANCEL AMBIENCE TALKING MOD ISOLATOR PHASER1 PHASER2 PHASER3 T_PHASER1 T_PHASER2 EP PHASER1 EP PHASER2 EP PHASER3 PITCH CHG1 PITCH CHG2 PITCH CHG3 DUAL ROT BRT D ROT BRT F DUAL ROT WRM D ROT WRM F DUAL ROT SP1 DUAL ROT SP2 ROTARY SP1 ROTARY SP2 ROT SP2 FAST ROTARY SP3 ROT SP3 FAST ROTARY SP4 ROT SP4 FAST ROTARY SP5 ROT SP5 FAST ROTARY SP6 ROTARY SP7 ROT SP7 FAST ROTARY SP8 ROT SP8 FAST ROTARY SP9 ROT SP9 FAST 2WAY ROT SP DST+ROT SP DST+2ROT SP OD+ROT SP OD+2ROT SP AMP+ROT SP AMP+2ROT SP AUTO PAN1 AUTO PAN2 AUTO PAN3 EP AUTOPAN T_AUTO PAN1 T_AUTO PAN2 TREMOLO1 TREMOLO2 TREMOLO3 EP TREMOLO GT TREMOLO1 GT TREMOLO2 VIBE VIBRATE T_TREMOLO 142 Description V Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded. A sense of attack can also be added to the sound. This effect independently compresses the level of certain frequency bands in the sound. Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded. A sense of attack can also be added to the sound. Gates the audio signal when the audio signal falls below a specified level. Attenuates the audio in the center position. Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound to add spatial width. Adds a vowel sound to the input signal. Attenuates the level of audio signals only at mid-range frequencies. Cyclically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound. Changes the pitch of the input signal. Rotary speaker simulation with speed switching. Simulates a rotary speaker. Distortion and rotary speaker connected in series. Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. Overdrive and rotary speaker connected in series. Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. Amp simulator and rotary speaker connected in series. Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back). Tempo synchronized pan. Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation. Vibraphone effect. Tempo synchronized tremolo. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones MSB 103 103 103 103 83 83 105 105 105 LSB 0 17 1 16 16 17 16 17 0 83 0 84 85 88 93 115 72 72 72 108 108 72 72 72 80 80 80 99 99 99 99 99 99 69 71 71 71 71 70 70 66 66 69 71 71 69 69 69 69 86 69 86 69 86 69 86 71 71 71 71 121 121 70 71 70 70 71 70 119 120 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 19 0 16 17 18 16 16 0 1 16 30 17 31 0 1 16 17 23 18 24 17 20 18 19 0 22 25 17 18 19 20 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 16 0 1 21 0 1 16 19 0 18 20 19 0 0 Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos No. 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 Type AUTO WAH1 AUTO WAH2 AT WAH+DST1 AT WAH+DST2 AT WAH+OD1 AT WAH+OD2 TEMPO AT WAH TOUCH WAH1 TOUCH WAH2 TOUCH WAH3 TC WAH+DST1 TC WAH+DST2 TC WAH+OD1 TC WAH+OD2 WH+DST+DLY1 WH+DST+DLY2 WH+DST+TDLY WH+OD+DLY1 WH+OD+DLY2 WH+OD+TDLY1 WH+OD+TDLY2 CLVI TC WAH1 CLVI TC WAH2 EP TC WAH1 EP TC WAH2 PEDAL WAH PEDAL WH+DST P.WH+DIST HD P.WH+DIST HV P.WH+DIST LT PEDAL WH+OD P.WH+OD HD P.WH+OD HV P.WH+OD LT NO EFFECT THRU Description Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter. The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Distortion. The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Overdrive. Tempo synchronized auto wah. Changes the center frequency of a wah filter according to the input level. The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Distortion. The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Overdrive. Wah, Distortion and Delay are connected in series. WAH, Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Wah, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series. WAH, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Clavinet Touch Wah. EP Touch Wah. Pedal position changes the center frequency of the wah filter. Distortion applied to the pedal wah output. Overdrive (distortion) applied to the pedal wah output. No effect. Bypass without applying an effect. MSB 78 78 78 78 78 78 79 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 97 97 102 97 97 102 102 82 82 82 82 122 122 122 122 122 122 122 122 122 0 64 LSB 16 0 17 1 18 2 0 0 8 20 16 1 17 2 16 0 0 17 1 1 16 18 28 19 29 0 1 21 23 25 2 22 24 26 0 0 • Effect types cannot be adjusted, except for the following: Reverb level, Chorus level, DSP level on page 93 (For example, delay time cannot be changed in DELAY LCR1). • The actual effect may not be audible depending on the particular Voice. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 143 Specifications Specifications / Technische Daten / Spécifications techniques / Especificaciones Dimensions [W x D x H] 1,369mm x 502mm x 852mm (53-7/8" x 19-3/4" x 33-9/16") With music rest [W x D x H] 1,369mm x 502mm x 1,006mm (53-7/8" x 19-3/4" x 39-5/8") Weight Keyboard 49kg (108 lbs.) Type GHS (Graded Hammer Standard) keyboard with matte black keytops Number of keys 88 Touch Sensitivity Soft/Medium/Hard/Off Size and Type 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit) Pedal Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft Display Cabinet Voices Effects Styles Songs Score, Lyrics Yes Contrast Yes Key Cover Style Sliding Music rest Yes Tone Generation Technology AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling Number of Dynamic Steps 3 Number of Polyphony (Max.) 64 Number of Voices 131panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices Reverb 35 types Chorus 44 types Harmony 26 types DSP 238 types Dual Yes Split Yes Number of Styles 160 Preset styles + External files Fingering Multi fingering/Full keyboard One Touch Setting Yes Number of Songs 30 Preset songs + 5 User songs + 70 External songs (CD-ROM) Recording 5 User Songs Easy Song Arranger Yes Lesson Yes Music Data Base Number of MDB 300 Preset MDB + External files Storage USB device Yes Range 5–280 Tempo Metronome Registration Memory Other Functions Connectivity Amplifiers/Speakers Accessories Optional Accessories Yes 8 Banks x 2 Piano Reset Yes Performance Assistant Technology Yes Transpose, Tuning Yes Headphones 2 USB TO HOST Yes USB TO DEVICE Yes Amplifiers 20W + 20W Speakers 12cm x 2 Included Accessories Accessories CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide, My Yamaha Product User Registration, Bench (included or optional depending on locale), Owner’s Manual Headphones HPE-150 Floppy Disk Drive UD-FD01 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. * Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die technischen Daten, das Gerät selbst oder Sonderzubehör nicht in jedem Land gleich sind, setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung. * Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche. * Las especificaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito de servir como información. Yamaha Corp. se reserva el derecho a efectuar cambios o modificaciones en los productos o especificaciones en cualquier momento sin previo aviso. Puesto que las especificaciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos los mercados, solicite información a su distribuidor Yamaha. 144 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 145 146 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC. By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Verbraucherinformation zur Sammlung und Entsorgung alter Elektrogeräte Befindet sich dieses Symbol auf den Produkten, der Verpackung und/oder beiliegenden Unterlagen, so sollten benutzte elektrische Geräte nicht mit dem normalen Haushaltsabfall entsorgt werden. In Übereinstimmung mit Ihren nationalen Bestimmungen und den Richtlinien 2002/96/ EC, bringen Sie alte Geräte bitte zur fachgerechten Entsorgung, Wiederaufbereitung und Wiederverwendung zu den entsprechenden Sammelstellen. Durch die fachgerechte Entsorgung der Elektrogeräte helfen Sie, wertvolle Ressourcen zu schützen und verhindern mögliche negative Auswirkungen auf die menschliche Gesundheit und die Umwelt, die andernfalls durch unsachgerechte Müllentsorgung auftreten könnten. Für weitere Informationen zum Sammeln und Wiederaufbereiten alter Elektrogeräte, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre örtliche Stadt- oder Gemeindeverwaltung, Ihren Abfallentsorgungsdienst oder die Verkaufsstelle der Artikel. [Information für geschäftliche Anwender in der Europäischen Union] Wenn Sie Elektrogeräte ausrangieren möchten, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihren Händler oder Zulieferer für weitere Informationen. [Entsorgungsinformation für Länder außerhalb der Europäischen Union] Dieses Symbol gilt nur innerhalb der Europäischen Union. Wenn Sie solche Artikel ausrangieren möchten, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre örtlichen Behörden oder Ihren Händler und fragen Sie nach der sachgerechten Entsorgungsmethode. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 147 Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques. Le symbole sur les produits, l’emballage et/ou les documents joints signifie que les produits électriques ou électroniques usagés ne doivent pas être mélangés avec les déchets domestiques habituels. Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez les déposer aux points de collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la réglementation nationale et aux Directives 2002/96/EC. En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, vous contribuerez à la sauvegarde de précieuses ressources et à la prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé humaine qui pourraient advenir lors d’un traitement inapproprié des déchets. Pour plus d’informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter votre municipalité, votre service de traitement des déchets ou le point de vente où vous avez acheté les produits. [Pour les professionnels dans l’Union Européenne] Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques veuillez contacter votre vendeur ou fournisseur pour plus d’informations. [Information sur le traitement dans d’autres pays en dehors de l’Union Européenne] Ce symbole est seulement valables dans l’Union Européenne. Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser de déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter les autorités locales ou votre fournisseur et demander la méthode de traitement appropriée. Información para Usuarios sobre Recolección y Disposición de Equipamiento Viejo Este símbolo en los productos, embalaje, y/o documentación que se acompañe significa que los productos electrónicos y eléctricos usados no deben ser mezclados con desechos hogareños corrientes. Para el tratamiento, recuperación y reciclado apropiado de los productos viejos, por favor llévelos a puntos de recolección aplicables, de acuerdo a su legislación nacional y las directivas 2002/96/EC. Al disponer de estos productos correctamente, ayudará a ahorrar recursos valiosos y a prevenir cualquier potencial efecto negativo sobre la salud humana y el medio ambiente, el cual podría surgir de un inapropiado manejo de los desechos. Para mayor información sobre recolección y reciclado de productos viejos, por favor contacte a su municipio local, su servicio de gestión de residuos o el punto de venta en el cual usted adquirió los artículos. [Para usuarios de negocios en la Unión Europea] Si usted desea deshacerse de equipamiento eléctrico y electrónico, por favor contacte a su vendedor o proveedor para mayor información. [Información sobre la Disposición en otros países fuera de la Unión Europea] Este símbolo sólo es válidos en la Unión Europea. Si desea deshacerse de estos artículos, por favor contacte a sus autoridades locales y pregunte por el método correcto de disposición. 148 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CA U TI ON RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 12 13 14 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 149 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-500-2925 Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 MALAYSIA DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 6747-4374 TAIWAN ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Yamaha Music (Russia) Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB54 Yamaha Global Home http://www.yamaha.com Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division © 2009 - 2011 Yamaha Corporation WR86780 103POCR*.*-**B0 Printed in Indonesia
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110
  • Page 111 111
  • Page 112 112
  • Page 113 113
  • Page 114 114
  • Page 115 115
  • Page 116 116
  • Page 117 117
  • Page 118 118
  • Page 119 119
  • Page 120 120
  • Page 121 121
  • Page 122 122
  • Page 123 123
  • Page 124 124
  • Page 125 125
  • Page 126 126
  • Page 127 127
  • Page 128 128
  • Page 129 129
  • Page 130 130
  • Page 131 131
  • Page 132 132
  • Page 133 133
  • Page 134 134
  • Page 135 135
  • Page 136 136
  • Page 137 137
  • Page 138 138
  • Page 139 139
  • Page 140 140
  • Page 141 141
  • Page 142 142
  • Page 143 143
  • Page 144 144
  • Page 145 145
  • Page 146 146
  • Page 147 147
  • Page 148 148
  • Page 149 149
  • Page 150 150
  • Page 151 151
  • Page 152 152

Yamaha YDP-V240 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Sintetizador
Tipo
El manual del propietario
Este manual también es adecuado para